Home

ZyXEL NBG4615 User's Manual

1. LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the NBG4615 s port type Status For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays Down when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled TxPkts This is the number of transmitted packets on this port RxPkts This is the number of received packets on this port Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Tx B s This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port Rx B s This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port Up Time This is the total time the NBG4615 has been for each session System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on Poll Interval s Enter the time interval in seconds for refreshing statistics in this field Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll I nterval s field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 6 Monitor 6 7 WLAN Station Status Click the WLAN Station Status Details hyperlink in the
2. M 160 Chapter 18 Hj er 163 LAETI II MET T INE E 163 Ace bi LIN DE RR REI Um LN M 163 NBG4615 User s Guide EN Table of Contents 18 3 What VOU Need TO KNOW 4 csssisssenderteaw pate pl p Gb hb bcp aut ec d one RO NNN 164 19 2 1 IP TU e cuss ea aediarteesin EE di boo cene cet ba erant A E da elc Pn ada 164 To aoe EAN TORI deem c er T 164 OSIP ANIE soc Mii ata EM eet en ae Rb ep A damp Reliq b ebd 164 TOM LAMIESOEBBET cost escas cca Mon pa o apt E et emu dtatetebhu tac qs teu Cte ete 165 EOD tester lE I OL DL TRE 165 Chapter 19 PAOR SANET oec cei curse cannes cv dada RE LEG LEER LAXE ULIS TUER XAR ERR TORRE TEE HK DUDAS ED Fr 167 DENEN II E T E UT NE etree A 167 LEN IS CES EDEN eee idine oe ohsccenrepbaiedoarcen r PROERDUN 167 19 1 2 What You Need To KNOW sorsoran pcc Daten au EUER EUER POUR de D p E E GERD 167 TOA Sonora cT 168 ripe ec E 169 Chapter 20 BIBT cei cu A pee emer COE T ORE RE EETEL EE CUR DR LEER TUER E EE E GREEK SE T A REL EDEN EAE A VELA CER 171 caBQE o0 5 MERI OESTE TN E ctype tea sakedanan eer E 171 ze NUES SC OU RE BICIS E QD i E T 171 20 71 2 har You Need TO KNOW 2o p bre eroi ae cn ap Ead ee D Rp LEE RO ee Da PC 172 202 Gonera erem 173 US eite iip M a E A R 174 ERRE or U S xc REN E E ENT cmm 176 Oy TEC MII SN FUSS iid ornan mE 177 20 5 1 NATPort Forwarding Services and Port Numbers sese 177 205 2 NAT Port Fareaiding Example secessit pads E
3. LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address which uniquely identifies a device The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Expires in This field displays the time when the IP address and MAC address association ends Refresh Click Refresh to renew the screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 6 Monitor 6 6 Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status packet specific statistics and the system up time The Poll I nterval s field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen Figure 28 Summary Packet Statistics Packet Statistics Packet Statistics Packet Statistics Port Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx Bis Rx Bis Up Time WAN 100M 13625 31171 0 1954809 19399482 01 28 11 LAN 100M 13024 7748 14250762 673520 01 28 11 WLAN Down 0 2 0 0 343 00 00 00 System Up Time 1 hour 29 mins 17 secs Poll Interval s E sec Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Summary Packet Statistics
4. IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address Address pool for LAN Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool for LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 19 DHCP Server 19 3 Advanced This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG4615 sends to the DHCP clients To change your NBG4615 s static DHCP settings click Network DHCP Server Advanced The following screen displays Figure 107 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced General Advanced LAN Static DHCP Table LAN Static DHCP Table MAC Address IP Address 1 o0 00 00 00 00 00 pooo 2 fo0 00 00 00 00 00 pooo 3 fo0 00 00 00 00 00 pooo 4 o0 00 00 00 00 00 pooo 6 fo0 00 00 00 00 00 booo 7 00 00 00 00 00 00 pooo 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 pooo DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server ous Relay 7 0 0 Second DNS Server None x cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION
5. 78 TO x issu 80 DENT TOOG E EO SLE waedatadan viiaaduaiacddalaaansscadddaiacaciaaianeiaunannende 80 Chapter 11 Universal Repealer ModE 82 IER S t e P 82 TS s rub Ec DID TEE 82 113 What rou Need to Know Ae ted wees case ects carne a Goede careageee Seamer de caecedaceeunants 83 11 4 Setting your NBG4615 to Universal Repeater Mode cceccccesesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeseaeeennees 83 11 5 Universal Repeater Moda Status Sereen ciciscisscedccssecceiccaesecsacaanss seiateotes uoaaeaaeeoccadduete Ge Vd du pee otv dad cats 84 TLE Unversal Repedier SOGO e 86 DEW TAU TE UU E E ETAT 87 TeL SS i crne 88 TILES VP PIS uoo cervis va aad cea o icr NOAM UR HR 89 Chapter 12 WSP Tea act rc seco see pases mE M SE EE 90 NBG4615 User s Guide EN Table of Contents Pe PULS NND T I TU UI mMMmMmMMT 90 DT TOU LIS UB issuedisa incdus asd bcne camara E A damn Dehn oda put Dd ap A uS UD ntt eaa 90 t29 What YOU INGE O RNOW e a a AO 90 12 2 1 Setting your NBGAGTA 19 WISP MOGE 5e ER boc RR Heri EETA NNS 91 12 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator in WISP Mode essent 91 jer WISP Mode SEAS SOGO e 92 12 5 Wireless LAN Gereral HOGEN serino aiaia i aaRS TAN aiaa 95 jp ee WEF ER I UU UL UE a retrenr rer ar reee Fecrre reer rere 96 12 5 WFA PI ioni eri a nd Ete re
6. Sys OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 is set Access Point Mode LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client or None WLAN Information 78 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode Table 31 Status Screen Access Point Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 s wireless LAN is set Access Point Mode MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN ON or OFF Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard WPS This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up Click the status to displa
7. NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility The following table describes the menus in this screen Table 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Screen Menus MENU ITEM DESCRIPTION System Exit This closes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Tools Configuration This opens the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility configuration window Auto Connect Printer List This opens the list window that displays all of the printing devices connected to the NBG4615 Help About This opens the about window which provides information of the utility software and driver versions Auto Connect Set Auto Connect Printer You can set the selected printer to auto connect Printer after you have connected it to your computer during inital connection If the printer is auto connected to your computer they will always be connected over the network You do not need to configure it manually each time Click this to show your installed printer list and select the one you want to set as auto connected Note If the computer is connecting to the shared USB printer for the first time you need to click Connect and setup the printer before you can use the Auto Connect Printer function See Chapter 14 on page 121 for more details Note You first must install the appropriate drivers for the printer that you intend to use Delete Auto Connect Printer This removes the auto connect option from the select
8. WIR TES ERRA E ER E ERA BTR ERRELE RAAE JERE AT BEA k PT 32 BEER gt AVRR East ZEEE PTR EDA RZ A ee RE Ris SEE APB SRIF MET CBN GS AL gt Mice E FREE RET EA TANABE PREERIAN ES BIRAJA SC eral fe ek L9 PARERA ERA E E i TR e ARRET T EGER UP FERE S208 AST BER ESAE TENEH AOE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL
9. Firewall This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not Bandwidth This shows whether the bandwidth management is enabled or not Management UPnP This shows whether UPnP is enabled or not Configuration Mode This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing Expert IPv6 Status Item This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording Data This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 IPv6 Connection Type This shows the type of IPv6 connection that is currently in use LAN IPv6 Link Local Address This shows the NBG4615 s LAN IPv6 link local address Summary BW MGMT Monitor Click Details to go to the Monitor BW MGMT Monitor screen Section 6 4 on page 51 Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using DHCP Table Click Details to go to the Monitor DHCP Table screen Section 6 5 on page 51 Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Click Details to go to the Monitor Packet Statistics screen Section 6 6 on page 53 Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Click Details to go to the Monitor WLAN Station Status screen Section 6 7 on page 54 Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 Interface Status
10. Access Point NBG4615 User s Guide 223 Chapter 29 Maintenance 29 10 Sys OP Mode Screen Use this screen to select how you want to use your NBG4615 Figure 151 Maintenance Sys OP Mode Sys OP Mode Configuration Mode Router Mode C Access Point Mode C Universal Repeater Mode C wisP Mode Note Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network WISP Mode In this mode the device acts as a wireless client It can connect to an existing network via an access point Also router functions are added between the wireless WAN and the LAN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in the General screen Table 90 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION System Operation Mode Router Select Router Mode if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings Access Point Select Access Point Mode if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network
11. BW MGMT Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently Status associated to the NBG4615 CONFI GURATI ON Network 72 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 30 Navigation Panel Router Mode continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN Security Use this screen to configure the level of wireless security for the NBG4615 MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4615 to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG4615 Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings Qos Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS Scheduling Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS on your NBG4615 IPv6 IPv6 Use this sc
12. Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection I nformation Figure 177 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager i Disable Wireless amp KNetworkManager v a Wired Devices 3 Switch to Offline Mode X Wired Network 4 Show Connection Information Ei Dial Up Connections Configure X Options NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 178 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager Device Addressek Statistics Received Transmitted Bytes 2317441 841875 MBytes 2 2 0 8 Packets 3621 3140 Errors 0 0 Dropped 0 0 KBytes s 0 0 0 0 NBG4615 User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireles
13. WLAN Station Status If the NBG4615 has successfully connected to an AP or wireless router it displays the SSID and MAC address of the AP or wireless router in this field WPS This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up Click the status to display Network Wireless LAN WPS screen System Status Item This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording Data This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG4615 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4615 s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the NBG4615 is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using System Setting Configuration Mode This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing Expert Summary NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Table 33 Status Screen Universal Repeater Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Pa
14. lt INTERNEJ Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 107 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY BU ah elo IEEE 802 1X N METHOD MANUAL KEY z MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 119 or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows yo
15. Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 174 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility eoo twork Utili Info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger PortScan Please sels eiueckinterface for information Network Interface en1 a Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 Transfer Statistics IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network System e Preferences F Authorizations o Hal T E Hardware Drivers elp and Suppo About GNOME G About Ubuntu Hardware Testing ISl Language Support
16. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 4 3 PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation Figure 98 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation Internet Connection Advanced IGMP Snooping ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation User Name Password Retype to Confirm iv Nailed Up Connection idle Timeout sec PPTP Configuration Server IP Address C Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second ONS Server WAN MAC Address c Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address C Set WAN MAC Address E 00 in seconds m m From ISP From ISP 7 m Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Network gt
17. NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode Click Status to open the following screen Figure 31 Easy Mode Status Screen System Name Firmware Version Wireless Network Name SSID Security 8 2 What You Can Do You can do the following in this mode Use this Navigation Panel to opt out of the Easy mode Section 8 4 on page 59 Use the Network Map screen to check if your NBG4615 can ping the gateway and whether it is connected to the Internet Section 8 5 on page 59 Use the Control Panel to configure and enable NBG4615 features including wireless security wireless scheduling and bandwidth management and so on Section 8 6 on page 60 Use the Status Screen to view read only information about the NBG4615 including the WAN IP MAC Address of the NBG4615 and the firmware version Section 8 7 on page 67 8 3 What You Need to Know Between the different device modes the Control Panel Section 8 6 on page 60 changes depending on which features are applicable to the mode Router Mode All Control Panel features are available Access Point Mode Only Power Saving and Wireless Security are available Universal Repeater Mode Only Power Saving and Wireless Security are available WI SP Mode The available features for this mode are Game Console Content Filter Bandwidth MGMT and Firewall WI SP UR Mode All Control Panel features are available NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8
18. Remote MAC Address 1 Remote MAC Address NENNEN Remote MAC Address C Security EncrypType AES fai Encryp Key The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Setup Basic Settings Select the operating mode for your NBG4615 e Disable The NBG4615 works as an access point only and cannot establish wireless links with other APs e AP Bridge The NBG4615 functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously e Bridge The NBG4615 acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which also must be in bridge mode The NBG4615 can establish up to five wireless links with other APs Local MAC This is the MAC address of your NBG4615 Address Phy Mode Select the Phy mode you want the NBG4615 to use This dictates the maximum size of packets during data transmission This field is not available when you select Disable in the Basic Setting field NBG4615 User s Guide EB Chapter 15 Wireless LAN Table 55 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote MAC This is the MAC address of the peer device that your NBG4615 wants to make a Address bridge connection with You can connect to up to 4 peer devices Security EncrypType Select whether to use WEP TKI P or AES encryption
19. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the NBG4615 uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 104 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the NBG4615 are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the NBG4615 identity NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your NBG4615 Table 105 Wirel
20. WISP Mode In this mode the device acts as a wireless client It can connect to an existing network via an access point Also router functions are added between the wireless WAN and the LAN WISP UR Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client and also maintains router function The wireless connection is treated as WAN while the LAN broadcast as Wi Fi signals for other wireless client devices to connect to Apply Cancel Note You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes As soon as you do your NBG4615 is already in WISP UR mode 3 When you select WISP UR Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 72 Pop up window for WISP mode x Ports are LAN 5 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN as WAN LAN DHCP server is configurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 1 WAN IP is configurable Click OK The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to WISP mode is successful 13 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator in WISP Mode To login to Web Configurator in WI SP UR Mode do the following 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 13 WISP UR Mode 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192 168 1 1 If you did not change this you can use the same IP address in WISP UR Mode Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192 168 1 1 as the web address in your web browser If you changed
21. i Login Window Quit Bis 2 Network Tools NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 3 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Network Settings ia Location Connections General DNS Hosts B Point to point connec This network interface is not c In the Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button e Authenticate x E fo System policy prevents modifying the configuration An application is attempting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of the users below is required to perform this action amp CJ chris gt Details E cancel 4 Authenticate gt H NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Inthe Network Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Network Settings tocation i8 8 Connections General DNS Hosts Point to point connec This network interface is not c tj end Properties x Connection Settings IP address Subnet mask G
22. 00 A0 C5 01 23 45 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 using an Ethernet cable 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192 168 1 2 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows Type cmd in the dialog box Enter ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 263 for information on changing your computer s IP address 4 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http 192 168 1 2 as the web address in your web browser n2 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 5 Enter 1234 default as the password and click Login 6 Type anew password and retype it to confirm then click Apply Otherwise click I gnore 7 The Easy mode appears Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel 8 Goto Configuration gt Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Configure the screen as follows In this example you select Enable Intra BSS Traffic for SSID Worker and SSID Guest to allow wireless clients in the same wireless network to communicate with each other Click Apply General secure h HAC rater neh ill Sos ws WPS Station Scheduling WDS L i Wireless Setup Wireless LAN ON Network Name SSID sS worker C Hide M Enable intra BSS Tra
23. 26 6 Monitor Screen Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using The bandwidth is measured in kilobits per second kbps The monitor shows what kinds of applications are running in the network the maximum kbps that each application can use as well as the percentage of bandwidth it is using Figure 128 Management Bandwidth Management Monitor Monitor XBox Live 0732768 kbps 0 XBox Live 0 32768 kbps 0 VoIP 0 32768 kbps 0 FTP 0732768 kbps 0 eMule 0 32768 kbps 0 BitTorrent 0 32768 kbps 0 E Mail 0732768 kbps 096 Instant Messenger 0732768 kbps 096 26 6 1 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of some services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Management Bandwidth Management Advanced screen Table 82 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet incl
24. BGB Com RL care pepe eerie ce eee reer ater ie ae ete Oe oa rere cre rae i re ieee ee ere ee eter rer 60 BD me EUIS See rePe rere E TRE eoe p p o UN ROM ey reer er D Rc RUD da b GR a IEEE ME 61 cs due Ec ee 61 B o Con TBI sce iai er pUR RORIS A CIR DN ORGANE CADRE ie DUARRE TANE 63 AE dccus edd iti cC E 63 msg gli soi MR TE EE LESER 64 BIB PIS SODUEE o usen Rena HP d Dada dabo bcd tere r en Teer ment rrr rc aiu du RD 64 Oo UN iy s DET Current rere tr ore 66 e uS heen In Easy Modo seriis ERA 67 Chapter 9 Router MOOD uie career ERU RARE RERKRN LREESRENEERAREREKAMEREAKR AEN MEREIERELEEASARMEAAILERS SGREROERRAKES EULUCE A UR AEREA 68 TAMMIE RUNE IE E MET 68 9 2 Router Mode Status Srogi uusxeicutknicn t npId D ER PERI RER FRED R BERE REEL RE HE Qu UK PUDOR RE kV PC RUE Qr hd RUR GE E 69 cpowE ce scia Eau c 72 Chapter 10 ACCESS POME TOO a fo secs toni eive pip pe corsa IMS TUIS M Pen SE si DIAS P ND R SERI NODIS RR M NS AN e NEEIS SR NES MM DER AER M ERA KR 75 DEC UU Em TERT 75 jv VOU Ae DO oaa E 75 TULGO A ToO NOSO TO AP os sassy Sak T E T N E A E A EEN 75 10 3 1 Setting your NBG4615 ta AP Mode si caccaccgceiseviccsceentadagiccanclaaniresladeceularuiadsebritbiegst A tede 76 10 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode sseseee 76 10 3 3 Configuring your WLAN Bandwidth Management and Maintenance Settings 77 Ue PTR a Sh dH MM
25. Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8 7 Status Screen in Easy Mode In the Network Map screen click Status to view read only information about the NBG4615 Figure 42 Status Screen in Easy Mode System Name Time WAN IP MAC Address Firmware Version Wireless Network Name SSID Security The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Status Screen in Easy Mode ITEM DESCRIPTION Name This is the name of the NBG4615 in the network You can change this in the Maintenance gt General screen in Section 29 3 on page 215 Time This is the current system date and time The date is in YYYY MM DD Year Month Day format The time is in HH MM SS Hour Minutes Seconds format WAN IP This is the IP address of the WAN port MAC Address This is the MAC address of the NBG4615 Firmware Version This shows the firmware version of the NBG4615 The firmware version format shows the trunk version model code and release number Wireless Network Name This shows the SSID of the wireless network You can configure this in the Wireless Security screen Section 8 6 6 on page 64 Section 15 2 on page 128 Security This shows the wireless security used by the NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide 67 Router Mode 9 1 Overview The NBG4615 is set to router mode by default Routers are used to connect the local network to another network for example the Internet In the figure below the
26. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen where you can modify the rule User defined Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications Service or services you specify This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Enable Select this check box to have the NBG4615 apply this bandwidth management rule Direction Select To LAN amp WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN and WLAN Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN Service Name Enter a descriptive name for the bandwidth management rule Category This is the category where a service belongs Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen See Section 26 5 2 on page 202 for more information Click the Remove icon to delete a rule Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management 26 5 1 Rule Configuration Application Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for a pre defined service or application click the Edit icon in the Application List table of the Advanced screen The following screen displays Figure 126 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration Application
27. For 2 4 GHz the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 2483 5 MHz There are no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2 4 GHz band Check http www arcep fr for more details Pour la bande 2 4 GHz la puissance est limit e 10 mW en p i r e pour les quipements utilis s en ext rieur dans la bande 2454 2483 5 MHz Il n y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en int rieur ou dans d autres parties de la bande 2 4 GHz Consultez http www arcep fr pour de plus amples d tails R amp TTE 1999 5 EC WLAN 2 4 2 4835 GHz IEEE 802 11 b g n Location Frequency Range GHz Power EIRP Indoor No restrictions 2 4 2 4835 100mW 20dBm Outdoor 2 4 2 454 100mW 20dBm 2 454 2 4835 10mW 10dBm 356 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix Legal Information Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner s property its use requires a general authorization Please check http www sviluppoeconomico gov it for more details Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia Se non viene installato all interno del proprio fondo l utilizzo di prodotti
28. Index certifications 351 notices 353 viewing 353 Channel 70 79 85 102 channel 126 293 interference 293 Configuration restore 220 content filtering 192 by keyword in URL 192 Cookies 193 copyright 351 CPU usage 71 79 85 93 102 CTS Clear to Send 294 D Daylight saving 218 DDNS 181 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 182 DHCP 51 167 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server 164 167 DHCP table 51 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 237 disclaimer 351 DNS 169 DNS Server 150 DNS server 169 Domain Name System 169 Domain Name System See DNS duplex setting 71 79 94 103 Dynamic DNS 181 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 167 dynamic WEP key exchange 298 NBG4615 User s Guide Index DynDNS 182 DynDNS see also DDNS 182 DynDNS Wildcard 181 E EAP Authentication 297 encryption 127 299 and local user database 128 key 128 WPA compatible 128 ESS 292 ESSID 231 Extended Service Set See ESS 292 F FCC interference statement 351 File Transfer Program 203 Firewall 188 Firewall overview guidelines 188 ICMP packets 189 network security Stateful inspection 188 ZyXEL device firewall 188 firewall stateful inspection 187 Firmware upload 219 file extension using HTTP firmware version 70 fragmentation threshold 294 FTP see also File Transfer Program 203 G General wireless LAN screen 128 Guest WLAN 129 Guest WLAN B
29. Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator Device Information Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created Sys OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 is set Universal Repeater Mode LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client or None WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 s wireless LAN is set Universal Repeater Mode MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN ON Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually or the NBG4615 automatically scans and selects Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard
30. OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or gerivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements including the GNU Public Licence This Product includes ppp software under below license Copyrights KK K K K K K K OK OK OK All of the code can be freely used and redistributed The individual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice Pppd pppstats and pppdump are under BSD style notices Some of the pppd plugins are GPL d Chat is public domain The BSD license Copyright c lt YEAR gt lt OWNER gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the lt ORGANIZATION gt nor the names of its contributors may be
31. Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday October and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click
32. Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any
33. eth etho Started automatically at boot P address assigned using DHCP NBG4615 User s Guide 287 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 288 YaST2 linux h2o0z Address Setup Select No Address Setup if you do not want any IP address for this device This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices Select Dynamic address if you do not have a static IP address assigned by the system administrator or your cable or DSL provider You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 176 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup Network Card Setup General Address onfiguration Name Ethernet I _ No IP Address for Bonding Devices D Dynamic Address DHCP i Statically assigned IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname IL jl Cancel 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save th
34. unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner NBG4615 User s Guide 297 Appendix E Wireless LANs EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication se
35. xot supe nc IEEE OU OE Lo DD SLT OSEE 197 Pone Mana aO IEEE 1 00 0115 07 5027 2200471700550 205 Unversal Fiug and Fay MPH 2i ue uti rout Eaque galerie ddu ats IR edo eager Eae enUL aa 207 ici gie f 215 Toupie AA aean a 227 NBG4615 User s Guide Contents Overview NBG4615 User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guid e I E E I E I t I 3 Document Conventions 5 esessos coss cese sonenn tag cnc nd Pe Co Eo Es sc Nes aE RCM SR A d RSS GSRA USE OR OEERENTN RAP MSS iaia 4 Soleh Wo AN pili ER 6 Conienis OVOI VID ciues mtsiumtes Ra i a MEER dM EC M DE PM MEME CE ad E dU 7 Table Of COMENTS E LS I I E I T I E 9 Part E USS QUIE Lu uid cetera de RM EU ME pF EP RN 19 Chapter 1 InHoduclioio dn OPERE AERA ER DR EERRO EREAEERREER a 21 DAE uU I MUTTER PIT PERPE 2 pF us Eee cT T 21 13 Wrage to Manage ihe NBGI6 DS mendiaren e E E E ER T 21 1 4 Good Habits Tor Managing he NBGAGIS 145 aea ar in ed ia a bil een aoe 22 K LEDE rts Ss cena da gatas eoniceaeeat ta pe ence ta qui MID ELE MID D M D UIS I ME E ELLE E EE EE 22 Chapter 2 El WPS cb P TICs 24 CARS i NE I T m m UU UE 24 Chapter 3 Zy XEL Natu SB Share Denier DEI uuo isses ak EAR MR MMMRRELEP ADU AR ER EA RUE MUR KE aaia 25 SOLE BIER E ac dessa ca ta Sauer ash istuc baron see saisie Eia SUELE docte FU SU Kom Erbe DS eode secu Cu M cL tn deca 25 CNMOERI LR d et
36. 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a
37. 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 99 Subnet 3 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 100 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 101 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 102 24
38. 1970 01 01 Current Time and Date C Manual New Time hh mm ss z if New Date yyyy mm dd i Get from Time Server Auto C User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone UTC 00 00 England 7 I Daylight Savings start Date mm dd I at o clock End Date I at o clock Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Maintenance gt Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG4615 Each time you reload this page the NBG4615 synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG4615 Each time you reload this page the NBG4615 synchronizes the date with the time server Current Time and Date Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually hh mm ss When you select Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply NBG4615 User s Guide 217 Chapter 29 Maintenance Table 87 Maintenance Time continued LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time
39. 4 Navigation Panel Use this navigation panel to opt out of the Easy mode Figure 32 Control Panel ru NBG4615 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Control Panel ITEM DESCRIPTION Home Click this to go to the Login page Expert Mode Click this to change to Expert mode and customize features of the NBG4615 Logout Click this to end the Web Configurator session 8 5 Network Map Note The Network MAP is viewable by Windows XP need to install patch Windows Vista and Windows 7 users only For Windows XP Service Pack 2 users you can see the network devices connected to the NBG4615 by downloading the LLTD Link Layer Topology Discovery patch from the Microsoft Website Note Don t worry if the Network Map does not display in your web browser This feature may not be supported by your system You can still configure the Control Panel Section 8 6 on page 60 in the Easy Mode and the NBG4615 features that you want to use in the Expert Mode When you log into the Network Configurator the Network Map is shown as follows Figure 33 Network Map Engine Saving Game J Power Content Bandwidth Firewa Wireless g IE Fitter mii MGMT OY Firewan SW Security ON OFF ON ON fo NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode The line connecting the NBG4615 to the gateway becomes green when the NBG4615 is able to ping the gateway It becomes red when the ping initi
40. 5267 f0 ff fe1 1 d7 50 64 Statetur x E 0 8 fee froo 30 minutes Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 16 IPv6 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 57 Network IPv6 DHCPv6 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 Connection Type Setup IPv6 Connection Type Select DHCPv6 as the IPv6 connection type if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPV6 server IPv6 DNS Setup DNS Setup Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information Or select User Defined to configure them manually First DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server s IP address in this field Second DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server s IP address in this field LAN IPv6 Address Setup LAN IPv6 address Enter a valid IPv6 address for the LAN using colon hexadecimal notation LAN IPv6 Link local This shows the IPv6 link local address that the NBG4615 generates Address Address Autoconfiguration Setup Enable Address Autoconfiguration Type automatically Select the checkbox to enable Address Autoconfiguration on the NBG4615 Select the IPv6 autoconfiguration type Stateless or Stateful If you choose Stateful enter the beginning and end of the IPv6 address range in the fields below If you choose Stateless IP addresses are not generated by a DHCP server They are formed by combining network prefixes with an interface ident
41. 7 8 9 A BB C D E and F NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each wireless client see the appropriate User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct settings SSID channel and security If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct settings This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it This is called user authentication However every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user e In the AP this feature is called a local user database or a local database e In a RADIUS server this is a server used in businesses more than in homes If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up use
42. ARE SET FORTH ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL GOAHEAD OR ITS DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE ORIGINAL CODE THE INABILITY TO USE THE ORIGINAL CODE NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements OR ANY DEFECT IN THE ORIGINAL CODE INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS EVEN IF THEY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE You agree that GoAhead and its distributors and dealers will not be LIABLE for defense or indemnity with respect to any claim against You by any third party arising from your possession or use of the Original Code or the Documentation In no event will GoAhead total liability to You for all damages losses and causes of action whether in contract tort including negligence or otherwise exceed the amount You paid for this product SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE 7 Indemnification by You You agree to indemnify and hold GoAhead harmless against any and all claims losses damages and costs including legal expenses and reasonable counsel fees arising out of any claim of a third party with resp
43. Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab ean Network 4 Show All Q Location Automatic Hj Show Built in Ethernet m PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Using DHCP HJ IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 Qo 1 Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me 3 Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure I Pv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask e In the Router field type the IP address of your device reeeo Network 4 ShowAll a Location Automatic B Show Built in Ethernet HJ PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Manually HJ IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Router DNS Servers Search Domains IPv6 Address r1 id Click the lock to prevent further changes 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configure IPv6 Optional Assist me Apply Now 6 Click Apply Now and close the window NBG4615 User s Guide 277 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by
44. Autoconfiguration on the NBG4615 Type Select the IPv6 autoconfiguration type Stateless or Stateful If you choose Stateful enter the beginning and end of the IPv6 address range in the fields below If you choose Stateless IP addresses are not generated by a DHCP server They are formed by combining network prefixes with an interface identifier which are derived from embedded IEEE Identifiers See page 143 for more information Router Advertisement Specify the lifetime of the router advertisement Lifetime BEN e Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 16 2 2 IPv6 Connection DHCPv6 If you select DHCPv6 as the IPv6 Connection Type the following screen displays Figure 92 Network gt IPv6 DHCPv6 IPv6 IPv6 Connection Type Setup IPv6 Connection Type IPv6 DNS Setup DNS Setup First DNS Server Second DNS Server LAN IPv6 Address Setup LAN IPv6 address LAN IPv6 Link local Address Type Address start Address end Router Advertisement Lifetime Address Autoconfiguration Setup M Enable Address Autoconfiguration DHCPv6 User Defined v Boo db8 feed b00 a 64 fe80
45. Configurator in Access Point Mode Log in to the Web Configurator in Access Point mode do the following 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192 168 1 2 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 76 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows Type cmd in the dialog box Enter ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 263 for information on changing your computer s IP address 4 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192 168 1 2 as the web address in your web browser Note After clicking Login the Easy mode appears Refer to Section on page 57 for the Easy mode screens Change to Expert mode to see the screens described in the sections following this 10 3 3 Configuring your WLAN Bandwidth Management and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless bandwidth management and maintenance settings in Access Point mode is the same as for Router Mode e See Chapter 15 on page 125 for information on the configuring your wireless network e See Chapter 26 on page 197 for information on configuring your Bandwidth Management screen e See Chapter 29 on page 215 for information on configuring
46. Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission asci CO HEX Orey1 keyexampiet 23 Okey2 Okey 3 o Key 4 Note Only WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled 11 Select SSID Vol P from the SSID drop down list Configure the screen as follows Click Apply WPS Statio Scheduling WDS Security SSID SSD VoP v Security Mode WPA PSK w Pre Shared Key VolPOnly12345678 Group Key Update Timer 3600 _ seconds Hote Only WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 12 Click the MAC Filter tab to configure MAC filtering for the SSID VoIP wireless network Select SSID VoIP from the SSID drop down list and select Allow in the Policy field Enter the VoIP device s MAC address in the Add a station Mac Address field and click Apply to allow only the VoIP device to associate with the NBG4615 using this SSID General Security MAC Filter i Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Access Policy SSID SSID VoP Policy Alow w Add a station Mac Address MAC Filter Summary Delete MAC Address MAC Address W 00 A0 C5 01 23 45 14 5 Connecting the NBG4615 in Universal Repeater Mode to an AP or Wireless Router If you have an access point or wireless router with Internet access deployed in your network already and you want to have wireless clients conn
47. Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any
48. List General Advanced Monitor Rule Configuration XBox Live Enable Direction Bandwidth Destination Port Source Port Protocol 1 Vv LAN WLAN Minimum Bandwidth 7 Eo kbps TCP 2 Vv LAN WLAN Minimum Bandwidth 7 Eo kbps UDP 3 iv WAN Minimum Bandwidth z 10 kbps TCP 4 iv WAN Minimum Band width x fio kbps UDP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration Application List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Enable Select an interface s check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface Direction These read only labels represent the physical interfaces Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the NBG4615 and be managed by bandwidth management Bandwidth Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second Destination Port This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic See Appendix F on page 305 for some common services and port numbers Source Port This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type for exa
49. NBG4615 has been on This field displays your NBG4615 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4615 s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the NBG4615 is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using System Setting Firewall This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not Bandwidth This shows whether the bandwidth management is enabled or not Management UPnP This shows whether UPnP is enabled or not Configuration Mode This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing Expert Summary BW MGMT Monitor Click Details to go to the Monitor BW MGMT Monitor screen Section 6 4 on page 51 Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 37 Status Screen WISP Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Table Click Details to go to the Monitor gt DHCP Table screen Section 6 5 on page 51 Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Click Details to go to the Monitor gt
50. Power Set the output power of the NBG4615 in this field If there is a high density of APs in an area decrease the output power of the NBG4615 to reduce interference with other APs Select one of the following 100 90 75 50 25 or 10 See the product specifications for more information on your NBG4615 s output power HT High Throughput Physical Mode Use the fields below to configure the 802 11 wireless environment of your NBG4615 Operating Mode Choose this according to the wireless mode s used in your network Mixed Select this if the wireless clients in your network use different wireless modes for example IEEE 802 11b g and IEEE 802 1n modes Green Select this if the wireless clients in your network uses only one type of wireless mode for example IEEEE 802 11 n only Channel Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network Bandwidth It is recommended that you select 20 40 20 40 MHz Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN Table 50 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Guard Interval Select Auto to increase data throughput However this may make data transfer more prone to errors Select Long to prioritize data integrity This may be because your wireless network is busy and congested or the NB
51. Repeater mode Click OK The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to Universal Repeater mode is successful 11 5 Universal Repeater Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen Device Information Item Host Name Firmware Version Sys OP Mode LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode MAC Address Status Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WLAN Station Status Interface Status Interface LAN WLAN Figure 55 Status Universal Repeater Mode Data NBG4615 V1 00 BWQ 0 B6_20100908 Universal Repeater Mode 00 E0 98 09 09 00 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 None Universal Repeater Mode 00 E0 98 09 09 00 ON ZyXEL Channel 05 2432MHz Channel 05 2432MHz No Security 802 11b g n SSIDofMvAP 00 19 CB 4B 21 C0 Configured CF Refresh Interval None v Refresh Now System Status Item Data System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage 57 mins 47 secs 2000 01 01 00 58 08 System Setting Configuration Mode Summary Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 33 Status Screen Universal Repeater Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION
52. S LICENSES OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS THE OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND OR SOFTWARE OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a lice
53. Section 6 5 on page 51 Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Click Details to go to the Monitor Packet Statistics screen Section 6 6 on page 53 Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG4615 port types The port types are LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled 13 4 0 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in WISP UR mode NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 13 WISP UR Mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Access Point mode Figure 74 Menu WISP UR Mode MONITOR CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE open all close 4
54. Security gt Firewall gt Services continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Protocol Select the protocol ALL TCP UDP or BOTH used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule Dest Port Range Enter the port number range of the destination that define the traffic type for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic Source Port Range Enter the port number range of the source that define the traffic type for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic Add Rule Click Add to save the firewall rule Firewall Rule This is your firewall rule number The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn Service Name This is a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule Dest IP This is the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering Source IP This is the IP address of the computer from which traffic for the application or service is initialized Protocol This is the protocol ALL TCP UDP or BOTH used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule Dest Port Range This is the port number range of the destination that define the traffic type for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic Source Port This is the port number range of the source that define the traffic type for Range example TCP port 80 defines web traffic Action Drop Traffic
55. Security Mode WPA PSK 802 11 Mode 802 11b gin Configured 14 3 1 Configure Your Notebook Note We use the ZyXEL M 302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client The screens may vary for different models 1 The NBG4615 supports IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g and IEEE 802 11n wireless clients Make sure that your notebook or computer s wireless adapter supports one of these standards 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer See your wireless adapter s User s Guide for information on how to do that 3 After you ve installed the utility open it If you cannot see your utility s icon on your screen go to Start gt Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears The utility displays a list of APs within range as shown in the example screen below NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 4 5 Select WPA PSK and type the security key in the following screen Click Next Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect Ruai ble Network ust Site Information Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 119 Channel 6 Security PA PSK MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Surveyed at 11 46 38 il CPE_5257_00 11 54 tj xl Security Settings gt Encryption Type WPA PSK Pre Shared Key Thisismy WPA PSkpre sharedkey Back Next Exit 6 The Confirm S
56. Shortcut 3h View workgroup computers Rename Properties Other Places E NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 6 Right click on the icon for your NBG4615 and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG4615 Figure 139 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway peccemus General mj ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Model Number Description ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP NBG4615 User s Guide Maintenance 29 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Maintenance screens 29 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen to set the timeout period of the management session Section 29 3 on page 215 e Use the Password screen to change your NBG4615 s system password Section 29 4 on page 216 e Use the Time screen to change your NBG4615 s time and date Section 29 5 on page 217 e Use the Firmware Upgrade screen to upload firmware to your NBG4615 Section 29 6 on page 219 e Use the Backup Restore screen to view information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration Section 29 8 on page 221 e Use the Reset Restart screen to reboot the NBG4615
57. Status screen View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 in the Association List Association means that a wireless client for example your network or computer with a wireless network card has connected successfully to the AP or wireless router using the same SSID channel and security settings Figure 29 Summary Wireless Association List Association List Association List Association List id MAC Address Association Time 1 00 22 FB 65 9A F4 03 39 07 1970 01 01 Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Summary Wireless Association List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG4615 s WLAN network Refresh Click Refresh to reload the list EB NBG4615 User s Guide T NBG4615 Modes 7 1 Overview This chapter introduces the different modes available on your NBG4615 First the term mode refers to two things in this User s Guide Web Configurator mode This refers to the Web Configurator interface you want to use for editing NBG4615 features Device mode This is the operating mode of your NBG4615 or simply how the NBG4615 is being used in the network 7 1 1 Web Configurator Modes This refers to
58. Table 7 Internet Connection Type Static IP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Gateway Enter the gateway IP address in this field Primary DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG4615 uses a system DNS server in the order you specify here to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server Enter the primary DNS server s IP address in the fields provided Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS server s IP address in the fields provided Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving Back Click this to return to the previous screen Next Click this to continue 4 3 3 Connection Type PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE functions as a dial up connection PPPoE is an IETF Internet Engineering Task Force standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem for example DSL cable wireless etc to achieve access to high speed data networks For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for instance RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables th
59. This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e IEEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS 210 of the Industry Canada Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi and 5dBi Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication IMPORTANT NOTE IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator amp your body 352 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix Legal Information IK f
60. WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly out Nailed up Connection Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN Table 60 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG4615 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is from ISP the default selection Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address IP Subnet Mask Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting
61. WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation This field displays N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled NBG4615 User s Guide 79 Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 10 4 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in Access Point mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Access Point mode Figure 50 Menu Access Point Mode MONITOR CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE open all close all pen all close all open all close all Monitor Maintenance Refer to Table 30 on page 72 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel 10 5 LAN Screen Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in Access Point mode Click Network LAN to see the screen below Note If you change the IP address of the NBG4615 in the screen below you will need to log into the NBG4615 again using the new IP address Figure 51 Network gt LAN gt IP IP i IP
62. a URL customize the keyword blocking using commands See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filtering chapter I can access the Internet but I cannot open my network folders In the Network LAN Advanced screen make sure Allow between LAN and WAN is checked This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure If you still cannot access a network folder make sure your account has access rights to the folder you are trying to open I cannot access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode When you change from router mode to AP mode your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 Refer to Appendix D on page 263 for instructions on how to change your computer s IP address What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection How can I solve this problem The following factors may cause interference e Obstacles walls ceilings furniture and so on 232 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting e Building Materials metal doors aluminum studs e Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors cordless phones and other wireless devices To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection you can e Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or su
63. appears as shown Figure 118 Network gt RIP RIP RIP Setup RIP None Apply cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Network gt RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP Select the RIPv1 or RIPv2 you want the NBG4615 to use Otherwise select None Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide 185 Chapter 23 RIP NBG4615 User s Guide Firewall 24 1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG4615 and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN By default the firewall e allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks e blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 119 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN 24 1 1 What You Can Do e Use the General screen to enable or disable the NBG4615 s firewall Section 24 2 on page 189 Use the S
64. applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer Destination Address End Enter the ending IP address of the destination computer The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer Destination Port This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic Source Address Start Enter the starting IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer Source Address End Enter the ending IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service The NBG4615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer Source Port This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic Protocol Select the protocol TCP UDP BOTH for which the bandwidth management rule applies If you select BOTH enter the protocol for which the bandwidth management rule applies For example ICMP for ping traffic Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management See Appendix F on page 305 for commonly used services and port numbers
65. bandwidth management rules based on an application In the figure below uplink traffic goes from the LAN device A to the WAN device B Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device B to the LAN device A Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN Figure 123 Bandwidth Management Example VOIP gt FTP gt HTTP gt Chat Email You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to individual applications like VoIP Web FTP and E mail for example 26 2 What You Can Do e Use the General screen to enable bandwidth management and assign bandwidth values Section 26 4 on page 198 e Use the Advanced screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre defined services and applications Section 26 5 on page 198 e Use the Monitor screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using Section 26 6 on page 203 NBG4615 User s Guide 197 Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management 26 3 What You Need To Know The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface LAN to WAN WLAN to WAN must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen Section 26 5 on page 198 The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN interface WAN to LAN WA
66. be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup gzip org madler alumni caltech edu If you use the zlib library in a product we would appreciate not receiving lengthy legal documents to sign The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind The library has been entirely written by Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler it does not include third party code If you redistribute modified sources we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes Please read the FAQ for more information on the distribution of modified source versions This Product includes libupnp software under below license Copyright c 2000 2003 Intel Corporation NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of i
67. bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 103 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 103 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator as
68. can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down NBG4615 User s Guide 275 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon ean System Preferences gt q Personal gH o E a oo Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware t i gt A 0 y p Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse e e a B QuickTime Sharing 8 B e Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure eoo Network J a Show ail Q Location Automatic Show Network Status 3 Built in Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing is on and is using AirPort to share the 6 AirPort connection 1 id Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 276 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP
69. computer This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers Restrict Web Select the box es to restrict a feature When you download a page containing a Keyword Blocking Features restricted feature that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out ActiveX A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications When you visit an ActiveX Web site ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser where they remain in case you visit the site again Java A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds Cookies Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID Web Proxy A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security administrative control and caching service When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server Enable URL The NBG4615 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address For example if the keyword bad was enabled all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked e g URL http www website com bad html would be blo
70. d a papa aac Lec atl 221 29 9 System Ciperabor Mode COI 2 sicobaadestbon i as artc uisus alode ed aai d deat OU pcnc ana d E a 221 29 T0 us CP Mode DOBLE Er bien p rrioc ot e ade a ioc Frenne icu PE fe terme 224 Chapter 30 FROUBIGSH GOT mm 227 COMES si Nt bU ovo S 227 30 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS seseseeeeeene eene nennen nnn neni 227 20 2 NEGIC IS Antess and BOSE 255 eco rapta pite ER ePOd ad v Corbis ad eed Ren da A 228 Ear Mule E IL D S TE TUS 230 30 5 Resetting the NBG4615 fo Its Factory Defaulls 1 eerte ccena nter tpe neu erani kenne 231 20 6 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting sisossaassbrcGexea ta rexkkS 12 pi Fa qp da eR Y EO CKER Abb ERE ERR d 231 po USB Levice PIUOBBIE ai rio erede bead ed necad c ecu EE ve leg vore M Moro Dd da Re a eceueae UD dRU FM dune 233 30 9 ZYXEL Share Center DIU Problems iioii ee erae ect abr snack el Urb eroe iE exten bunk cie ree pan 234 Appendix A Product Specifications PER m 237 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions ssssseeeee 241 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting esssssseeseeeeeeennnee enn 253 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address esseeeeseseseneeeeeenn 263 Appendix E Wireless LANS escpnetimd pex MORD EHE DECOR RETREAT MO ADIRE CRUM RA NE T d M HR i 291 Append F Common Services oup eH Eod EUR NIE Di Rr Aa LR AR BELA
71. default This means your current settings are lost See Section 30 5 on page 231 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG4615 I forgot the password 1 The default password is 1234 2 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 30 5 on page 234 I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting e If you changed the IP address Section 18 4 on page 165 use the new IP address e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I don t know the IP address of my NBG4615 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled See Appendix B on page 241 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG4615 If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG4615 skip this step e If there is a DHCP server on your network make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address See Section 18 4 on page 165 e If there is no DHCP server on your network make sure your computer s IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG4615 See Section 18 4 on page 165 5 Resetthe device to
72. define the source and destination IP addresses and port for a service or application NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management Note The two tables shown in this screen can be configured and applied at the same time Click Management gt Bandwidth Management gt Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen Figure 125 Management gt Bandwidth Management gt Advanced Management Bandwidth Upstream Bandwidth m s bps Downstream Bandwidth eu bps Application List Application List Priority Category Service Advanced Setting 1 High gt Game Console XBox Live g I PlayStation 2 MSN Game Zone g T Battlenet a 2 Hion v VoIP vol 2 3 Hion gt Instant Messenger I instant Messenger g 4 Hion z Web Surfing web Surfing a 5 righ P2PIFTP FTP Ei T eMule 2 I BitTorrent 2 6 righ E Mail T E Mail 3 User defined Service User defined Service Enable Direction Service Name Category Modify 1 r To tanawian v cameconsoe E E 2 F To nawn v C 31 Gmecwee E ZW 3 FC Fo anaman e j m E if 4 M FoLanawian E 41 Came conse ej ZW s Fr re LANEWLAN E omecese E i s O re nawan v 1 came con E N 7 G Frotanawian E EE came conoe E i25 s a To anwan E C 1 care conme By Aopy cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Management gt Bandwidth Management gt Advanced LABEL DE
73. e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 e Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast address format is as follows Table 109 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix G IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is
74. gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 270 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise 1 Click Start Control Panel ES Snipping Tool Cs Calculator lt a XPS Viewer ap Windows Fax and Scan Magnifier Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support gt All Programs 2 Inthe Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and I nternet category SB Control Panel Adjust your computer s settings System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Ne k and x View netwo
75. hosts Global Local This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note Inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet An inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 68 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN Note NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destinatio
76. in Universal Repeater mode are similar to the ones in Access Point Mode See Chapter 15 on page 125 through Chapter 29 on page 224 of this User s Guide 11 4 Setting your NBG4615 to Universal Repeater Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192 168 1 2 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows Type cmd in the dialog box Enter ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 263 for information on changing your computer s IP address 4 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http 192 168 1 2 as the web address in your web browser 5 Enter 1234 default as the password and click Login 6 Type a new password and retype it to confirm then click Apply Otherwise click Ignore 7 The Easy mode appears Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel 8 To set your NBG4615 to Universal Repeater Mode on the left of the screen click Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode and select Universal Repeater Mode Figure 53 Changing to Universal Repeater mode Sys OP Mode Configuration Mode C Router Mode C Access Point Mode io Universal Repeater Mode C wisp Mode C wisP UR Mode Note Router In this mode the device is
77. kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Directive Compliance Information for 2 4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Directive Czech ZyXEL t mto prohla uje ze tento za zen je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 EC Danish Undertegnede ZyXEL erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr udstyr overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF German Hiermit erkl rt ZyXEL dass sich das Ger t Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EU befindet Estonian K esolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele English Hereb
78. maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERI
79. manually Depending on the devices in your network you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN Personal Identification Number in the devices Then they connect and set up a secure network by themselves See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 14 2 on page 105 WDS Wireless Distribution System or WDS security is used between bridged APs It is independent of the security between the wired networks and their respective APs If you do not enable WDS security traffic between APs is not encrypted When WDS security is enabled both APs must use the same pre shared key 15 2 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to configure the SSIDs of the wireless LAN and configure guest wireless network settings NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN Note If you are configuring the NBG4615 from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG4615 s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG4615 s new settings 15 2 1 Guest WLAN Guest WLAN allows you to set up a wireless network where users can access to Internet via the NBG4615 Z but not other networks connected to the Z In the following figure a guest user can access the Internet from the guest wireless network A via Z but not the home
80. might agree to some other arrangement if you talk to me before you start violating GPL terms This Product includes igmpproxy software under below license igmpproxy IGMP proxy based multicast router Copyright C 2005 Johnny Egeland lt johnny rlo org gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by NBG4615 User s Guide 333 Appendix H Open Software Announcements the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA This software is derived work from the following software The original source code has been modified from it s original state by the author of igmpproxy smcroute 0 92 Copyright C 2001 Carsten Schill lt carsten cschill de gt Licensed under the GNU General Public License version 2 mrouted 3 9 beta3 COPYRIGHT 1989 by The Board of Trustees of Leland Stanford Junior University Original license can be found in the Stanf
81. network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication e Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication e Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
82. number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal NBG4615 User s Guide 253 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 167 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 bE um u mm mm um umo um mmmmmmmmmm How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the
83. of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties NOTE Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy modify and redistribute the software For at least three 3 years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support support zyxel com tw for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution a complete machine readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in posses
84. overlap they should use different channels Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information e Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network SSID Normally the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
85. paste operations via script Q Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt 8 Scripting of Java applets Q Disable Prompt lleas Aube En b Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Y Reset i ced Java Permissions 1 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 UnderJava permissions make sure that a From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab safety level is selected NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 1 2 Click OK to close the window Figure 160 Security Settings Java Security Settings EU 7 xi Settings Q Disable 9 Enable ER Font download Q Disable 9 Enable y Q Prompt 5 Microsoft vM Er Java permissions custom tisable Jav 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings 1 Reset to Medium Reset cm JAVA Sun From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected NBG4615 User s Guide 247 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions Click OK to close the window Figure 161 Java Sun Internet Options Ad xl General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Us
86. portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versi
87. programs too NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is n
88. select an end time using the second set of hour and minute min For the following times 24 Hour Format drop down boxes If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN 15 10 WDS Screen A Wireless Distribution System WDS is a wireless connection between two or more APs Use this screen to set the operating mode of your NBG4615 to AP Bridge or Bridge and establish wireless links with other APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which also must be in bridge mode Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG4615 and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS tab The following screen opens with the Basic Setting set to Disabled and Security Mode set to No Security Figure 90 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling wos SS E WDS Setup Basic Setting AP Bridge Local MAC Address 00 E0 98 09 09 00 Phy Mode CCK b Remote MAC Address i 1
89. set the selected printer to auto connect after you have connected it to your computer during inital connection If the printer is auto connected to your computer they will always be connected over the network You do not need to configure it manually each time lr Note If the computer is connecting to the shared USB printer for the first time you need to click Connect and setup the printer before you can use the Auto Connect Printer function See Chapter 14 on page 121 for more details Note You first must install the appropriate drivers for the printer that you intend to use Connect Select a USB device and then click this button to connect to it Your computer can connect to as many USB devices as are connected to the NBG4615 AS Disconnect Select a device to which your computer is connected and then click this button to disconnect from it Request to Connect Some USB devices may not allow automatic connections over the network If so select the device in question and click this button to issue a request to connect to it Network Scanner Click this to open the scanner options on your computer for working with a scanner connected to the network N 3 2 1 The Menus This section describes the utility s menus Figure 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Menus a Tools Configuration About As ue Connect Auto Connect Printer List Printer Je Set Auto Connect Printer
90. subnet 253 Subnet Mask 165 166 subnet mask 254 subnetting 256 Summary DHCP table 51 Packet statistics 53 Wireless station status 54 syntax conventions 4 System General Setup 215 System restart 221 T TCP IP configuration 167 Temperature 237 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 299 Time setting 217 trigger port 178 Trigger port forwarding 178 example 178 process 178 U Universal 82 Universal Plug and Play 207 Application 207 Security issues 207 Universal Repeater 82 86 Universal Repeater Mode status screen 84 UPnP 207 URL Keyword Blocking 193 user authentication 127 local user database 127 RADIUS server 127 User Name 182 V VoIP 204 VPN 155 NBG4615 User s Guide Index W WAN Wide Area Network 149 WAN advanced 159 WAN MAC address 150 warranty 353 note 354 Web Configurator how to access 43 Overview 43 web configurator 21 Web Proxy 193 WEP Encryption 87 88 89 96 97 133 134 WEP encryption 132 WEP key 132 Wi Fi Protected Access 299 Wildcard 181 Wireless association list 54 wireless channel 231 wireless client WPA supplicants 300 wireless LAN 231 wireless LAN scheduling 140 Wireless network basic guidelines 125 channel 126 encryption 127 example 125 MAC address filter 126 overview 125 security 126 SSID 126 Wireless security 126 overview 126 type 126 wireless security 231 295 Wireless tutorial 105 WISP Mode status screen 92 101 Wizard setup 33 W
91. such entity whether by contract or otherwise or b ownership of fifty percent 5096 or more of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 Source Code License 2 1 Limited Source Code Grant 326 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements GoAhead hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license subject to third party intellectual property claims to use reproduce modify copy and distribute the Original Code 2 2 Binary Code GoAhead hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license to copy and distribute the binary code versions of the Original Code together with Your Modifications 2 3 License Back to GoAhead You hereby grant in both source code and binary code to GoAhead a world wide royalty free non exclusive license to copy modify display use and sublicense any Modifications You make that are distributed or planned for distribution Within 30 days of either such event You agree to ship to GoAhead a file containing the Modifications in a media to be determined by the parties including any programmer s notes and other programmers materials Additionally You will provide to GoAhead a complete description of the product the product code or model number the date on which the product is initially shipped and a contact name phone number and e mail address for future correspondence GoAhead will keep confidential all data specifical
92. that are not specified in the Application screen If you do not assign a Default Server I P address the NBG4615 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 20 3 Application Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded To change your NBG4615 s port forwarding settings click Network gt NAT gt Application The screen appears as shown Note If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT General screen the NBG4615 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management Refer to Appendix F on page 305 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 111 Network NAT Application Add Application Rule Active Ss fl Port Ex 10 20 30 40 Server IP Address pooo Application Rules Summary Application Rules Summary Active Name Port Server IP Address Modify Apply Cancel 174 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 20 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Network NAT Application LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Application Rule Active Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forward
93. the IP address of your NBG4615 while in Router mode use this IP address in WI SP UR Mode Mode The WISP UR Mode Mode IP address is always the same as the Router mode IP address Note After clicking Login the Easy Mode appears Refer to Section on page 57 for the Easy Mode screens Click Expert mode to see the screens described in the sections following this 13 4 WISP UR Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen gJ Status Host Name Firmware Version Sys OP Mode WAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway DHCP LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode MAC Address Status Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WPS Interface Status Interface Figure 73 Status WISP UR Mode ZyXEL ITE Data NBG4615 V1 00 BWQ 1 83 WISP UR Mode 50 67 F0 11 D7 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client 50 67 F0 11 D7 50 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server AP Wireless Client Mode 50 67 F0 11 D7 50 OFF ZyXEL Auto Channel Channel 06 2437MHz No Security 802 11b gin Unconfiqured E Refresh Interval None z System Status Item System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage System Setting Firewall Bandwidth Management UPnP Configuration Mode IPv6 Connection Type L
94. the configuration interface of the Web Configurator which has two modes Easy The Web Configurator shows this mode by default Refer to Chapter 8 on page 57 for more information on the screens in this mode This interface may be sufficient for users who just want to use the device Expert Advanced users can change to this mode to customize all the functions of the NBG4615 Click Expert Mode after logging into the Web Configurator The User s Guide Chapter 5 on page 43 through Chapter 29 on page 224 discusses the screens in this mode 7 1 2 Device Modes This refers to the operating mode of the NBG4615 which can act as a Router This is the default device mode of the NBG4615 Use this mode to connect the local network to another network like the Internet Go to Section 9 2 on page 69 to view the Status screen in this mode Access Point Use this mode if you want to extend your network by allowing network devices to connect to the NBG4615 wirelessly Go to Section 10 4 on page 78 to view the Status screen in this mode Universal Repeater In this mode the NBG4615 can be an access point and a wireless client at the same time Use this mode if there is an existing wireless router or access point in your network and you also want to allow clients to connect to the NBG4615 Go to Section 11 5 on page 84 to view the Status screen in this mode WISP Use this mode if there is an existing wireless router or access point in the network to whic
95. the following times 24 Hour Format C on off Iv Everyday oo hour 00 min oo hour 00 min C on off Mon oo chour o0 min 00 hour oo min C on off T Tue 00 hour oo min o0 hour oo min C on of Wed oo hour 00 min o0 hour oo min C on off T Thu oo hour 00 wv min oo hour 00 min C on off Fri oo hour 00 v min oo hour oo min C on of sat 00 hour o0 min o0 hour co min C on 6 off Sun 00 hour oo min oo hour oo min Note Specify the same begin time and end time means the whole day schedule Apply cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Scheduling Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling Scheduling WLAN Status Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off This field works in conjunction with the Day and For the following times fields Day Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days This field works in conjunction with the For the following times field Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute min drop down boxes and
96. the license for published software set forth in subparagraph c 3 of that clause The Original Code i was developed at private expense and no part of it was developed with governmental funds ii is a trade secret of GoAhead or its licensor s for all purposes of the Freedom of Information Act iii is restricted computer software subject to limited utilization as NBG4615 User s Guide 331 Appendix H Open Software Announcements provided in the contract between the vendor and the governmental entity and iv in all respects is proprietary data belonging solely to GoAhead or its licensor s 10 Governing Law and Interpretation This Agreement shall be interpreted under and governed by the laws of the State of Washington without regard to its rules governing the conflict of laws If any provision of this Agreement is held illegal or unenforceable by a court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in effect and the invalid provision deemed modified to the least degree necessary to remedy such invalidity 11 Entire Agreement This Agreement is the complete agreement between GoAhead and You and supersedes all prior agreements oral or written with respect to the subject matter hereof If You have any questions concerning this Agreement You may write to GoAhead Software Inc 10900 N E 8th Street Suite 750 Bellevue Washington 98004 or send e mai
97. the name of the access point to which you are connecting Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless devices is called Selection a channel The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference Security Mode Select Static WEP to enable data encryption PassPhrase Enter a Passphrase up to 26 printable characters and click Generate A passphrase functions like a password In WEP security mode it is further converted by the NBG4615 into a complicated string that is referred to as the key This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless network WEP Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP Encryption m This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key The preceding Ox that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 40 WEP WISP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG4615 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadeci
98. there is no user authentication Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption IEEE 802 1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly Note It is not possible to use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database In this case it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your NBG4615 you can also select an option WPA Compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG4615 Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key WPS WiFi Protected Setup WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings
99. this screen Table 48 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure the security Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to enable data encryption WPA Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA2 PSK as the Security Mode Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA PSK security mode to connect to your NBG4615 Pre Shared Key WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password for authentication Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive keyboard characters Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new group Update Timer key out to all clients The default is 3600 seconds 60 minutes Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN 15 4 MACFilter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG4615 to give exclusive access to devices Allow or exclude devices from accessing the NBG4615 Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen To change your NBG4615 s MAC filter setting
100. time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network ove
101. to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License NBG4615 User s Guide Ea Appendix H Open Software Announcements 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Founda
102. to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the computer s Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP MAC address IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Address Set WAN MAC Address Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 5 Advanced WAN Screen Use this screen to enable Multicast and enable Auto bridge Note The categories shown in this screen are independent of each other NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN To change your NBG4615 s advanced WAN settings click Network gt WAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 100 Network gt WAN gt Advanced Internet Connection Advanced IGMP Snooping Multicast Setup Multicast None x Auto Subnet Configuration C None Enable Auto bridge mode Enable Auto IP Change mode Note Note If you choose to enable Auto IP Change mode the LAN IP will be automatically changed to 10 0 0 1 when WAN IP and LAN IP conflicts Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Network gt WAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Setup Multicast Select I GMPv1 v2 to enable multicasting This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN Select None t
103. use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4615 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the Second DNS Server read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG4615 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC addr
104. vy HN a Qa mU Main Tabs Feeds Privacy Security Advanced w Block pop up windows Exceptions IV Load images automatically Exceptions IV Enable JavaScript Advanced IV Enable Java J r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman Size 16 v Advanced Colors J r File Types Configure how Firefox handles certain types of files Manage NN Opera Opera 10 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary slightly NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions Allowing Pop Ups From Opera click Tools then Preferences In the General tab go to Choose how you prefer to handle pop ups and select Open all pop ups Figure 164 Opera Allowing Pop Ups General Forms Search Web Pages Advanced Opera can start with your favorite Web pages or continue from last time Startup Continue From last time Home page ntte fiportal opera com Lise Current Choose how you prefer to handle pop ups Pop ups C Open all pop t Open pop ups in background Block unwanted pop ups Block all pop ups Select your preferred language for Opera and Web pages Language Engish US en US Y Details Enabling Java x Preferences ox cme He From Opera click Tools then Preferences In the Advanced tab select Content from the left side menu Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 165
105. warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions NBG4615 User s Guide 353 Appendix Legal Information Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any
106. weather If the city you want is not listed choose one that is closest to it Finish Click this to apply the settings and refresh the date and time display 5 2 3 2 Time Date Edit One timezone can cover more than one country You can choose a particular country in which the NBG4615 is located and have the NBG4615 display and use the current time and date for its logs Click the icon to change the Weather display Figure 23 Change Password Screen Change time zone GMT 06 00 Central America GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Change Password Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Change time zone Select the specific country whose current time and date you want the NBG4615 to display Finish Click this to apply the settings and refresh the weather display Note You can also edit the timezone in Section 29 5 on page 217 4 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator 5 3 Resetting the NBG4615 If you forget your password or IP address or you cannot access the Web Configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG4615 to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192 168 1 1 5 3 1 How to Use the RESET Button 1 Make sur
107. without turning the power off Section 29 8 on page 221 e Use the Sys OP Mode screen to select how you want to use your NBG4615 Section 29 10 on page 224 29 3 General Screen Use this screen to set the management session timeout period Click Maintenance General The following screen displays Figure 140 Maintenance General General System Setup System Name feces S Domain Name BEyxecom Administrator Inactivity Timer E minutes 0 means no timeout Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide 215 Chapter 29 Maintenance The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Maintenance gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Setup System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4615 in an Ethernet network Domain Name Enter the domain name you want to give to the NBG4615 Administrator Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the Inactivity Timer session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 4 Password Screen It is strongly recommended that y
108. you are connecting Optional Security Mode Select No Security if the access point to which you want to connect does not use encryption Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode 11 6 2 Static WEP Figure 58 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN Universal Repeater Static WEP 88 General M Enable SSID Security Mode Encryption Type WEPKey Title WEPKey Default WEPkey1 WEPkey2 WEPkey3 WEPkey4 Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Universal Repeater Parameters MAC Address Optional Scheduling Universal Repeater Static WEP x Shared Key gt Apply cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Universal Repeater Parameters Enable Select this option to have the NBG4615 connect to the specified access point SSID Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the access point to which you are connecting Optional Security Mode Encryption Type Select Static WEP if the access point to which you want to connect uses WEP data encryption Select Open or Shared Key from the drop down list box This field spe
109. you do not know the IP address of the NBG4615 Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections NBG4615 User s Guide 2n Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Figure 137 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe z x JO search le Folders E Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks fa Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network See Also Local Area Connection Enabled 4 Network Troubleshooter Ca Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places Control Panel X9 My Network Places E My Documents ij My Computer Details Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your NBG4615 and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays Figure 138 Network Connections My Network Places Z My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help OQ gt 3 pO Search gt Folders Ea Address 3 My Network Places Network Tasks gl Add a network place View network connections t Invoke Set up a home or small XA TAA office network Create
110. 0 0 0 0 0 E F01 0 O050s0 0 0 F02 0 e c t d c c F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 O o jo oI jo e e e e e e C es e NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix G IPv6 Table 111 Reserved Multicast Address continued MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF09 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 Interface ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID EUI 64 The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements t
111. 15 1 1 What You Can Do Use the General screen to enter the SSID enable intra BSS traffic enable guest WLAN and select the channel Section 15 2 on page 128 e Use the Security screen to configure wireless security between the NBG4615 and the wireless clients e Use the MAC Filter screen to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG4615 Section 15 4 on page 135 NBG4615 User s Guide 125 Chapter 15 Wireless LAN e Use the Advanced screen to allow intra BSS networking and set the RTS CTS Threshold Section 15 5 on page 136 Use the QoS screen to ensure Quality of Service QoS in your wireless network Section 15 6 on page 137 e Use the WPS screen to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Section 15 7 on page 137 e Use the WPS Station screen to add a wireless station using WPS Section 15 8 on page 139 e Use the Scheduling screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off Section 15 9 on page 140 e Use the WDS screen to configure Wireless Distribution System on your NBG4615 Section 15 10 on page 141 15 1 2 What You Should Know Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines e Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentity e If two wireless networks
112. 15 itself as the gateway for each LAN network NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 18 LAN 18 4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change the IP address for your NBG4615 Click Network gt LAN gt IP Figure 104 Network gt LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Network gt LAN gt IP IP IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Type the IP address of your NBG4615 in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 5 IP Alias Screen Use this screen to have the NBG4615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets Click LAN gt IP Alias Figure 105 Network gt LAN gt IP Alias IP Alias 1 Pp Alias IP Address poco IP Subnet Mask pooo Appl Cancel IP IP Alias The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Network LAN IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias Check this to enable IP alias IP Address Type the IP alias addre
113. 1999 5 EC Norwegian Erkl rer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999 5 EF Romanian Prin prezenta ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerin ele esen iale si alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999 5 EC CEO National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries and other countries following the EU directive 1999 5 EC without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de l UE et dans tous les pays ayant transpos s la directive 1999 5 CE sans aucune limitation except pour les pays mentionn s ci dessous Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999 5 EC senza nessuna limitazione eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschr nkungen eingesetzt werden sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995 5 CE folgen mit AuBnahme der folgenden aufgef hrten Staaten In the majority of the EU and other European countries the 2 4 and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks LANs Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix Legal Info
114. 222 53 40 30 DHCPClient Jan 1 00 00 47 none dnsmasq 162g nameserver 208 67 220 220 53 41 lt 13 gt WEB Jan 1 00 00 47 none root WPS service stop OK 42 13 WEB Jan 1 00 00 47 none root MON server boot OK 43 13 WEB Jan 1 00 00 48 none root WPS service boot OK 44 13 NTPClient Jan 1 04 02 01 none root NTP client start Failed 45 13 WEB Jan 1 04 02 01 none root NTP client start Failed Refresh cead You can configure which logs to display in the View Log screen Go to the Log Settings screen and select the logs you wish to display Click Apply to save your settings Click Refresh to start the screen afresh Figure 25 Log Settings View Log Log Settings Active Log Mons IV ppp IV uPnP M wireless IV nTPCIient IV System Warning IV DHCP Server IV DHCP Client Moons M Firewall sse Retresn NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 6 Monitor 6 4 BW MGMT Monitor The Bandwidth Management BW MGMT Monitor allows you to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using The bandwidth is measured in kilobytes per second kbps The monitor shows what kinds of applications are running in the network the maximum kbps that each application can use as well as the percentage of bandwidth it is using Figure 26 Summary BW MGMT Monitor Monitor XBox Live 0 3276
115. 3 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 3 Connect to Internet The NBG4615 offers five Internet connection types They are Static I P DHCP PPPoE PPTP or L2TP The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using Figure 7 Detecting your Internet Connection Type If the wizard does not detect a connection type you must select one from the drop down list box Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type Note If you get an error message check your hardware connections Make sure your Internet connection is up and running The following screen depends on your Internet connection type Enter the details provided by your Internet Service Provider ISP in the fields if any Figure8 Internet Connection Type 1 Internet Connection Type DHCP Generally when your connection open your computer Your NBG4615 detects the following Internet Connection type Table 6 Internet Connection Type CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION Static IP Select the Static IP if an administrator assigns the IP address of your computer DHCP Select the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet PPPoE Select the PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet option for a dial up connection PPTP Select the PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol option for a dial up connection and your ISP gave you an IP address and or subnet mask L2TP Selec
116. 5 1 1 What You Need To KNOW 1 ceste nike nns x so ren ri me anu koe nun nnn an iioii inaa 192 De Sra TETTE 193 252 lechnical PICTON OIG sss nde xp te upto et te e da yea Epp ERES E pad eu er ic A PE E me RR E d ES NA 194 25 3 1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking 1 cesses scettr kenne ka tke 194 Chapter 26 Bandwidth Managemefil a caius aab ain ii cas eiie va a cu cR pata DIE c IMMER oaa UM MEM RM KE ENSE 197 ar ONONO eR Eme 197 26 2 What You Can Dc aoa tom addat xac da camada kc iue da E eu cca eso D E tanc aa b ac caede dt e Da dn 197 26 9 What You Need To KOOW ouo ioni st shea quate utes he Cudidede Poe direoee Set ol c OP ebd dede Phu Ted EEE AA 198 and RAVAN es Sd gtd eee title te CI LU LLL M oe es eS A ales 198 26 5 Advanced Screen iussi ca sce teen aste aa kae Cra i aaa d AGE va an haaa E eEE ANN i aaeain 198 26 5 1 Rule Configuration Application Rule Configuration oeeuccce cernes enormen 201 26 5 2 Rule Configuration User Defined Service Rule Configuration sssssssssss 202 263 Monko Cie eh aaan ta epi M DI DEI DIL Digo Redi ia 203 26 6 1 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services ssssssssssseeeeeeene enne 203 Chapter 27 Remote Managememi mee 205 FARE Ij anaa E a AA aa nn aAA aSa iR 205 era what ro Need qo PIC osise rbaa raaa 205 272 Remot Management and NAT iaciscensns bossznenaiadr esi gos tui d gr txR a jur C uii eset 205 zorg muse EO Lice ot o Rr caer pe am tob aatuburdt lut
117. 8 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 168 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting quw mM Sees Ss i I 4 I i i 3 I E I A P l i i i i E I E 8 I 4 L 192 168 1 0 24 i 3 a errr tT eet You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 169 Subnetting Example After Subnetting v3 i 5 i Ja i i i 3 i i R M ir 4 V 192 168 1 0 25 F 192 168 1 128 25 Nannen e oum um um um um um um o In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID ra
118. 8 kbps 0 XBox Live 0 32768 kbps 0 VoIP 0 32768 kbps 0 FTP 0 32768 kbps 0 eMule 0 32768 kbps 0 BitTorrent 0732768 kbps 0 E Mail 0732768 kbps 096 Instant Messenger 0732768 kbps 096 6 5 DHCP Table DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG4615 s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the NBG4615 provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on that network or else the computer must be manually configured Click the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including MAC NBG4615 User s Guide st Chapter 6 Monitor Address I P Address and Expiration time of all network clients using the NBG4615 s DHCP server Figure 27 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Table DHCP Client Table Table List 1 2 3 4 5 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Summary DHCP Table MAC Address 00 16 64 27 78 e8 00 24 21 7e 20 96 58 55 ca d4 36 0a 00 22 fb 65 9a f4 00 23 6c 63 e6 d1 IP Address 192 168 1 43 192 168 1 58 192 168 1 44 192 168 1 49 192 168 1 42 Expires in 23 45 46 23 29 56 22 53 27 23 13 05 19 41 28
119. 98 DD AA 08 IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 5 2 DHCP WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode WISP Mode MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD AA 08 Status ON Name SSID Connect Status Disassociated Security Mode No Security Interface Status Interface LAN WLAN e Refresh Interval None z System Status Item Data System Up Time 56 secs Current Date Time 1970 01 01 00 00 59 System Resource CPU Usage 096 Memory Usage System Setting Firewall Enabled Bandwidth Management Disabled UPnP Enabled Configuration Mode Expert Summary BW MGMT Monitor Details DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 37 Status Screen WISP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator Device Information identification purposes Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance General screen It is for Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 37 Status Screen WISP Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Sys OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 is set WISP Mode WAN Information MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Addr
120. A include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 T
121. AN IPv6 Link Local Address BW MGMT Monitor Details DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details Data 1 min 8 secs 1970 01 01 00 01 29 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled Expert Data Link local only fe80 5267 f0fffe11 4750 64 696 2496 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 13 WISP UR Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 43 Status Screen WISP UR Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator Device Information Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created Sys OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 is set WISP UR Mode WAN Information MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the WAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port s subnet mask Default Gateway This shows the WAN port s gateway IP address DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This sho
122. Alias LAN TCP IP C Get from DHCP Server C Use Defined LAN IP Address IP Address 192 1681 zd IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address DNS Assignment First DNS Server From ISP x Second DNS Server From ISP z eed cancel NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode The table below describes the labels in the screen Table 32 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get from DHCP Server Click this to deploy the NBG4615 as an access point in the network When you enable this the NBG4615 gets its IP address from the network s DHCP server for example your ISP Users connected to the NBG4615 can now access the network i e the Internet if the IP address is given by the ISP The Web Configurator may no longer be accessible unless you know the IP address assigned by the DHCP server to the NBG4615 You need to reset the NBG4615 to be able to access the Web Configurator again see Section 29 7 on page 220 for details on how to reset the NBG4615 Also when you select this you cannot enter an IP address for your NBG4615 in the field below Use Defined LAN IP Click this if you want to specify the IP address of your NBG4615 Or if your Address ISP or network administrator gave you a static IP address to access the network or the Internet IP Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation The default setting is 192 168 1 2 If you change the IP address yo
123. Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance 29 6 Firmware Upgrade Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension e g NBG4615 bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Click Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4615 Figure 143 Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Upgrade Firmware To upgrade the internal device firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure File Path Browse Upload On line Firmware Upgrade Check for Latest Firmware Now The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before yo
124. BG4615 allows you to connect a USB device such as printer scanner or portable hard disk directly to the USB port and then share that device over the Internet You can also connect a USB to the NBG4615 which can then share up to 3 additional USB devices with the rest of your personal home network 1 3 Ways to Manage the NBG4615 Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG4615 e WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG4615 using a supported web browser NBG4615 User s Guide at Chapter 1 Introduction 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4615 Do the following things regularly to make the NBG4615 more secure and to manage the NBG4615 more effectively e Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the NBG4615 to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the NBG4615 You could simply r
125. CII characters as WEP key Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key The preceding Ox that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN Table 47 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Static WEP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG4615 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 15 3 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 83 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Security ss ZyXEL Security Mode WwPa2 Psk v wea Compatible Pre Shared Key 12345678 Group Key Update Timer 3600 seconds Note WPA PSK and WPA2 P SK can be configured when WPS enabled The following table describes the labels in
126. Click Maintenance Backup Restore Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears as shown next Figure 145 Maintenance gt Backup Restore Backup Restore Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and retur to factory defaults After resetting the Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Maintenance gt Backup Restore LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup Click Backup to save the NBG4615 s current configuration to your computer File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them 220 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance Table 89 Maintenance gt Backup Restore continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Note Do not tur
127. EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes curl software under below license COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1996 2007 Daniel Stenberg lt daniel haxx se gt All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE
128. F Internet Explorer cA My Documents G Outlook Express V Paint Files and Settings Transfer W BY Command Prompt e My Music E Acrobat Reader 4 0 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures My Computer Tour Windows xP Wl Windows Movie Maker tg Printers and Faxes Q9 Help and Support Search All Programs gt 177 Run B Log Off oJ Turn Off Computer start untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network Connections icon E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help G Control Panel Address Q Bacl B P Search E Folders Ez V Control Panel A CG Switch to Category View Co tions See Also i Windows Update Game Controllers NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties ocal Area Connection Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter This connection uses the following items v E Client for Microsoft Networks v A File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Me BACON ERRARE De
129. G4615 is located in an environment prone to radio interference Extension This is set to Auto by default Channel If you select 20 40 as your Channel Bandwidth the extension channel enables the NBG4615 to get higher data throughput This also lowers radio interference and traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 15 6 Quality of Service QoS Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service such as VoIP and video a priority level Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen appears Figure 86 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS i WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS WMM Configuration IV Enable WMM QoS Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM QoS Check this to have the NBG4615 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 15 7 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable
130. Ga LATA E 305 Coco Te MPG M TE o n 309 Appendix H Open Software Announcements seessessssssseeeseeenenen eene nenne nennen nnne 317 NBG4615 User s Guide Table of Contents NBG4615 User s Guide Table of Contents NBG4615 User s Guide PART User s Guide Introduction 1 1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG4615 The NBG4615 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring providing easy network access to mobile users You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802 11b g n compatible devices A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing Note Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility for NetUSB functionality from the included disc or download the latest version from the zyxel com website 1 2 Applications Your can create the following networks using the NBG4615 e Wired You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG4615 so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet e Wireless Wireless clients can connect to the NBG4615 to access network resources e WAN Connect to a broadband modem router for Internet access e WPS Create an instant network connection with another WPS compatible device sharing your network connection with it NetUSB The N
131. IP address 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The NBG4615 times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol 178 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 20 NAT 20 5 5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG4615 and going to the outside 2 Ifan application needs a continuous data stream that port range will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can t trigger it NBG4615 User s Guide 179 Chapter 20 NAT NBG4615 User s Guide DDNS 21 1 Overview DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address 21 1 1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter What is DDNS DDNS or Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard
132. ISP Mode go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General and select WISP Mode Figure 61 Changing to WISP mode Sys OP Mode Configuration Mode C Router Mode C Access Point Mode C Universal Repeater Mode C Wisp Mode CwisP UR Mode Note Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network Universal Repeater Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client It can transmit wireless traffic between two wireless networks WISP Mode In this mode the device acts as a wireless client It can connect to an existing network via an access point Also router functions are added between the wireless WAN and the LAN WISP UR Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client and also maintains router function The wireless connection is treated as WAN while the LAN broadcast as Wi Fi signals for other wireless client devices to connect to Apply cancel Note You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes As soon as you do your NBG4615 is already in WISP mode 3 When you select WI SP Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 62 Pop up window for WISP mode x Ports are LAN 5 Et
133. Interface This displays the NBG4615 port types The port types are WAN LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation This field displays N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled NBG4615 User s Guide 71 Chapter 9 Router Mode 9 2 1 Navigation Panel Use the sub menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features Figure 45 Navigation Panel Router Mode MONITOR CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE open all close a pen all open all close all Monitor N d Maintenance Password Time Firmware Up Content Filter Management The following table describes the sub menus Table 30 Navigation Panel Router Mode LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG4615 s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables MONI TOR Log Use this screen to view the list of activities recorded by your NBG4615
134. Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example Content Filter The NBG4615 blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the NBG4615 Wireless LAN Scheduler You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled disabled Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG4615 You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the NBG4615 assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use a fixed URL
135. LAN interference 293 security parameters 302 World Wide Web 203 WPA 299 key caching 300 pre authentication 300 user authentication 300 vs WPA PSK 300 wireless client supplicant 300 with RADIUS application example 301 WPA compatible 128 WPA2 299 user authentication 300 vs WPA2 PSK 300 wireless client supplicant 300 with RADIUS application example 301 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 299 WPA2 PSK 299 300 application example 301 WPA PSK 299 300 application example 301 WPS 21 WWW 203 X Xbox Live 204 NBG4615 User s Guide Index NBG4615 User s Guide
136. LAN Static DHCP Table This is the index number of the static IP table entry row MAC Address Type the MAC address with colons of a computer on your LAN IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN DNS Server DNS Servers The NBG4615 passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP address in the Assigned by DHCP order you specify here to the DHCP clients The NBG4615 only passes this Server information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 19 DHCP Server Table 67 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4615 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only Second DNS Server DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you cli
137. Maintenance Static Route Refer to Table 30 on page 72 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel NBG4615 User s Guide Tutorials 14 1 Overview This chapter provides tutorials for setting up your NBG4615 e Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS e Configure Wireless Security without WPS e Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG4615 e Connecting the NBG4615 in Universal Repeater Mode to an AP or Wireless Router e Connecting to USB Storage with the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility e Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer 14 2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS This example uses the NBG4615 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook Note The wireless client must be a WPS aware device for example a WPS USB adapter or PCI card There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection This tutorial shows you how to do both e Push Button Configuration PBC create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button See Section 14 2 1 on page 105 This is the easier method PIN Configuration create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client s PIN Personal Identification Number in the NBG4615 s interface See Section 14 2 2 on page 106 This is the more secure method since one device can authenticate the other 14 2 1 Push Button Configuration PBC Make
138. Mode j Note Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through VVAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network Universal Repeater Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client It can transmit wireless traffic between two wireless networks WISP Mode In this mode the device acts as a wireless client It can connect to an existing network via an access point Also router functions are added between the wireless VAN and the LAN WISP UR Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client and also maintains router function The wireless connection is treated as VVAN while the LAN broadcast as Wi Fi signals for other wireless client devices to connect to Apply Cancei 9 Enter the password and click Login to access the web configurator again Click Expert Mode 10 Go to Configuration gt Network gt Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater to connect the NBG4615 wirelessly to an AP Select Enable Enter the SSID of the existing AP or wireless router to which you want to connect SSIDofMyAP in this example Enter the wireless security settings which are the same as those on the existing AP or wireless router to access it WPA PSK and KeyofMyWirelessNetwork in this examp
139. N to WLAN must be less than or equal to the Downstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen Section 26 5 on page 198 26 4 General Screen Use this screen to have the NBG4615 apply bandwidth management Click Management Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen Figure 124 Management gt Bandwidth Management gt General General Advanced Monitor i Service Management ivi Enable Bandwidth Management cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Management Bandwidth Management General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth This field allows you to have NBG4615 apply bandwidth management Management Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 26 5 Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre defined services or applications You can also use this screen to configure bandwidth management rule for other services or applications that are not on the pre defined list of NBG4615 Additionally you can
140. NBG4615 Wireless N Gigabit NetUSB Houter Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 1 1 Password 1234 Firmware Version 1 0 Edition 3 10 2011 www zyxel com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG4615 using the Web Configurator Tips for Reading User s Guides On Screen When reading a ZyXEL User s Guide On Screen keep the following in mind If you don t already have the latest version of Adobe Reader you can download it from http www adobe com Use the PDF s bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you Adobe Reader s bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL User s Guide PDFs If you know the page number or know vaguely which page range you want to view you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader then press ENTER to jump directly to that page Type CTRL F to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or phrase This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require You can also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader To quickly move around within a page press the SPACE bar This turns your cursor into a hand with which you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross references to related text Click them to jump to the correspond
141. NBG4615 connects the local network LAN1 LANA to the Internet Figure 43 NBG4615 Network LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 lt gt LAN4 WLAN Note The Status screen is shown after changing to the Expert mode of the Web Configurator It varies depending on the device mode of your NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode 9 2 Router Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen Figure 44 Status Screen Router Mode ZyXEL nec461 raa Status Device Information Item Host Name Firmware Version Sys OP Mode WAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway DHCP LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode MAC Address Status Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WPS Data NBG4615 V1 00 BWQ 1 B3 Router Mode 50 67 F0 11 D7 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client 50 67 F0 11 D7 50 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server Access Point Mode 50 67 F0 11 D7 50 OFF ZyXEL Auto Channel Channel 06 2437MHz No Security 802 11b g n Unconfigured System Status Item System Up Time 5 mins 30 secs Current Date Time 1970 01 01 00 06 26 System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage System Setting Firewall Enabled Bandwidth Management Disabled UPnP Enabled Configuration Mode Expert IPv6 Status Item Data IPv6 Co
142. NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS NBG4615 User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice TradeMarks NetUSB is a trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commiss
143. OD OF NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATI
144. ON ey 14 2 2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method you need to use both NBG4615 s configuration interface and the client s utilities Launch your wireless client s configuration utility Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Configuration Network Wireless LAN WPS Station screen on the NBG4615 3 Click Start buttons or button next to the PIN field on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG4615 s WPS Station screen within two minutes The NBG4615 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4615 securely The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG4615 and wireless client ex NWD210N in this example by using PIN method Figure 76 Example WPS Process PIN Method Wireless Client Access Point Continuous Access Mode E H PS ws station Scheduling WDS PIN 7 Manual Input 55 f WITHIN 2 MINUTES D s network 14 3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG4615 SSID SSID E
145. ONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 10 Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out
146. OSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes rp I2pt software under below license Copying All software included in this package is Copyright 2002 Roaring Penguin Software Inc You may distribute it under the terms of the GNU General Public License the GPL Version 2 or at your option any later version This Product includes zlib software under below license Copyright notice C 1995 2004 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not
147. Opera Enabling Java Preferences General Forms Search Web Pag quy Tabs Enable animated images Browsing Notifications Enable sound in Web pages Enable JavaScript E JavaScript Option Enable plug ins Style Options Content settings can be adapted to each site Manage Site Preferences Blocked Content x OK Cancel Help NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser click JavaScript Options Figure 166 Opera JavaScript Options x Allow resizing of windows Allow moving of windows Allow raising of windows Allow lowering of windows Allow changing of status field Allow scripts to detect context menu events Allow script to hide address bar Open console on error Mser JavaScript Folder Choose cma Select the items you want Opera s JavaScript to apply NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 252 NBG4615 User s Guide C IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum
148. P key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission asci C HEX Key 1 CKey2 D 7 C Key 3 Eg C Key 4 Note WPA P SK and WPA2 P SK can be configured when WPS enabled Apply Cancel The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 47 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure the security Security Mode Select Static WEP to enable data encryption PassPhrase Enter a Passphrase up to 26 printable characters and click Generate A passphrase functions like a password In WEP security mode it is further converted by the NBG4615 into a complicated string that is referred to as the key This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless network Select 64 bits or 128 bits WEP Encryption This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use Authentication Method Select Auto or Shared Key from the drop down list box This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client Keep this setting at Auto unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the NBG4615 occurs Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication ASCII Select this option in order to enter AS
149. Packet Statistics screen Section 6 6 on page 53 Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG4615 port types The port types are LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled 12 4 0 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in WISP mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Access Point mode Figure 64 Menu WISP Mode MONITOR CONFIGURATION close all Open al close all Monitor Loc BW MGMT Monitor DHCP Table t Statistics Refer to Table 30 on page 72 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode 12 5 Wi
150. Protocol Dest Port Range Source Port Range Action Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Security Firewall Services LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping The NBG4615 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is on selected Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Apply Click Apply to save the settings Enable Firewall Rule Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall rules that you define see Add Rule Firewall Rule below Apply Click Apply to save the settings Add Firewall Rule Service Name Enter a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule Dest IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering The NBG4615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer Source IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service The NBG4615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 24 Firewall Table 76
151. QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Security SSID SSID_Example3 Security Mode WPA PSK his ismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Group Key Update Timer 3600 seconds Pre Shared Key Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled Apply Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 6 Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status System Status Data Item Data Host Name NBG4615 System Up Time 3 mins 0 secs Firmware Version V1 00 BWQ 0 B8 Current Date Time 1970 01 01 00 03 09 Sys OP Mode Router Mode System Resource WAN Information CPU Usage os MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD AK 0C Memory Usage EE o IP Address 0 0 0 0 System Setting IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Firewall Enabled Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Bandwidth Management Disabled DHCP Client UPnP Enabled LAN Information Configuration Mode Expert MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD AA 08 IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Summary DHCP BW MGMT Monitor Details WLAN Information DHCP Table Details WLAN OP Mode Access Point Mode Packet Statistics Details MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD AA08 WLAN Station Status Details Status ON Name SSID SSID Example3 Channel Channel 06 2437MHz Operating Channel Channel 06 2437MHz
152. S supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and passw
153. S traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless clients can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless clients can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Enable Guest WLAN Select the check box to activate guest wireless LAN Note Only Router mode supports guest WLAN AP mode Universal Repeater mode and WISP mode don t support guest WLAN IP Address Type an IP address for the devices on the Guest WLAN using this as the gateway IP address IP Subnet Type the subnet mask for the guest wireless LAN Mask Enable Select this to turn on bandwidth management for the Guest WLAN network Bandwidth Management for Guest WLAN Maximum Enter a number to specify maximum bandwidth the Guest WLAN network can use Bandwidth Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel from the drop down list box The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled Auto Channel Select this check box for the NBG4615 to automatically choose the channel with Selection the least interference Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Section fiel
154. S1 amn o S2 w Renew to s toS toS DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote ID option and the interface ID option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface ID option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The NBG4615 uses the received IPv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the NBG4615 passes the IPv6 prefix inf
155. SCRIPTION Management Bandwidth Upstream Select the total amount of bandwidth from 64 Kilobits to 32 Megabits that you Bandwidth want to dedicate to uplink traffic This is traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN Downstream Select the total amount of bandwidth from 64 Kilobits to 32 Megabits that you Bandwidth want to dedicate to uplink traffic This is traffic from WAN to LAN WLAN NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management Table 79 Management gt Bandwidth Management gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Application List Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on a pre defined service This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low High Select this for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay e Mid Select this for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay e Low Select this for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Category This is the category where a service belongs Service This is the name of the service Select the check box to have the NBG4615 apply this bandwidth management rule Advanced Setting
156. SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder NOTICE Curl contains pieces of source code that is Copyright c 1998 1999 Kungliga Tekniska H g skolan This notice is included here to comply with the distribution terms This Product includes goahead software under below license License Agreement THIS LICENSE ALLOWS ONLY THE LIMITED USE OF GO AHEAD SOFTWARE INC PROPRIETARY CODE PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT AS IT PERTAINS TO THIS LICENSE YOU CERTIFY THAT YOU WILL USE THE SOFTWARE ONLY IN THE MANNER PERMITTED HEREIN 1 Definitions 1 1 Documentation means any documentation GoAhead includes with the Original Code NBG4615 User s Guide 325 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 1 2 G
157. The screen appears as shown Note Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port range at a time Figure 112 Network NAT Advanced Application Rules Summary Port Triggering Rules TEEN Incoming Trigger Port End Port Port End Port 8 b o po bo po 2c B 3 p p B 3 1 b 1 b 1 bo b 7 4 b b bh I booo o g E b booo o bk NN e po po bo b a b po po b o e po b p bo 9 1 po po b booo 40 po po po po t 1 b 1 b b y b 1 B2 p 1 b 1j b d bh o b 1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Network gt NAT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number read only Name Type a unique name up to 15 characters for identification purposes All characters are permitted including spaces Incoming Incoming is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The NBG4615 forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the NBG4615 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent
158. When this percentage is close to 10096 the NBG4615 is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 13 WISP UR Mode Table 43 Status Screen WISP UR Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using System Setting Firewall This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not Bandwidth This shows whether the bandwidth management is enabled or not Management UPnP This shows whether UPnP is enabled or not Configuration Mode This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing Expert IPv6 Status Item This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording Data This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 IPv6 Connection Type This shows the type of IPv6 connection that is currently in use LAN IPv6 Link Local Address This shows the NBG4615 s LAN IPv6 link local address Summary BW MGMT Monitor Click Details to go to the Monitor BW MGMT Monitor screen Section 6 4 on page 51 Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using DHCP Table Click Details to go to the Monitor DHCP Table screen
159. Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale Consultare http www sviluppoeconomico gov it per maggiori dettagli Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2 4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office Please check http www esd lv for more details 2 4 GHz frekven u joslas izmanto anai arpus telp m nepiecie ama atiauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas Vairak inform cijas http www esd lv Notes 1 Although Norway Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states the EU Directive 1999 5 EC has also been implemented in those countries 2 The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP The EIRP level in dBm of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used specified in dBi to the output power available at the connector specified in dBm NBG4615 User s Guide 357 Appendix Legal Information NBG4615 User s Guide Index A ActiveX 193 Address Assignment 150 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES AES 299 alternative subnet mask notation 255 antenna directional 303 gain 303 omni directional 303 AP 21 AP access point 293 AP Mode menu 80 86 94 103 status screen 78 AP Bridge 21 Auto bridge 160 161 Bandwidth management overview 197 priority 199 services 203 Basic Service Set See BSS 291 BitTorrent 204 Bridge Repeater 21 bridged APs security 128 BSS 291 C CA 298 Certificate Authority See CA
160. a ee E aD TER ACE DRM ena toU abri Rupe Fax rad ap aq 97 pete gc vc cc NE NT S I TT 98 Chapter 13 Lji 375 2 55 V9V9 99 XMES SI Hec ig acetic a cps eee sen E E E ed eee oe meee ae es 99 T3 N TOU CAN DO vaaan A teu Quim E DURER TAa 99 Toona A N OF TON ceca su taste SOT 99 13 3 1 Setting your NBG4615 to WISP UR Mode ennt nennen nnn danni 100 13 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator in WISP Mode sess 100 T9 AL WISP UR Mode SIUS DO BB saspe iced bee fce ite eter aay aetna tendes 101 Chapter 14 Uu OOoO 105 wee o MUR TM Tere 105 14 2 Set Upa Wireless Network with WPS sra ieissctesiesacsscccidnicciadanedessed ree pa e VT dia bett ix pud S Spe TAREE 105 TLA Push Buon Go fgbiradom PEG suopte it inaa AA datu b s ado t OV S or Duda 105 34 5 2 PIN Sera AION ciis itae sal Esa cctitn ao aa a Elo EK f Cut S ad EX oa Kf Cu E aided 106 14 3 Configure Wireless Secunty without WPG sisinio arna iS 107 45 1 Gah gure Your NODIDOOK 1 ois mro pn d e aoc d es eL aa P ci d br 109 14 4 Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBGAB TS a5 scgiccczascceed scctsgecerantuseatiaaaiaiecneaccuidaeiabadoncgadansunigeebeanineenees 111 14 4 1 Configuring Security Settings of Multiple SSIDs 0000 0 eeeceeeenceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesnaaeeeseneees 112 14 5 Connecting the NBG4615 in Universal Repeater Mode to an AP or W
161. a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place s
162. ady or has failed USB 1 2 Green On The NBG4615 has a USB device installed Blinking The NBG4615 is transmitting and or receiving data from routers through an installed USB device Off There is no USB device connected to the NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide The WPS Button 2 1 Overview Your NBG4615 supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves For more information on using WPS see Section 14 2 on page 105 NBG4615 User s Guide ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3 1 Overview The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility allows you to work with the USB devices that are connected directly to the NBG4615 as
163. age 61 to see this screen Content Filter Click this to restrict access to certain websites based on keywords contained in URLs to which you do not want users in your network to open Switch ON to apply website filtering Otherwise switch OFF Refer to Section 8 6 3 on page 63 to see this screen Bandwidth MGMT Click this to edit bandwidth management for predefined applications Switch ON to have the NBG4615 management bandwidth for uplink and downlink traffic according to an application or service Otherwise switch OFF Refer to Section 8 6 4 on page 63 to see this screen 60 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode Table 22 Control Panel continued ITEM DESCRIPTION Firewall Switch ON to ensure that your network is protected from Denial of Service DoS attacks Otherwise switch OFF Refer to Section 8 6 5 on page 64 to see this screen Wireless Security Click this to configure the wireless security such as SSID security mode and WPS key on your NBG4615 Refer to Section 8 6 6 on page 64 to see this screen 8 6 1 Game Engine When this feature is enabled the NBG4615 maximizes the bandwidth for gaming traffic that it forwards out through an interface Figure 35 Game Engine PR Game Engine x Whenever you turn the Game Engine on the router is designated to offer a better gaming experience The Game Console option in Bandwidth Management will be prioritized
164. age at the same time using the ZyXEL Share Center Utility Only one computer can connect to the USB storage through the ZyXEL Share Center Utlity at a time If two computers A and B want to connect to the USB storage by using the Utility do the following 1 After A finishes connection to the USB storage disconnect it by clicking Disconnect in A s Utlity 2 Connect B to the USB storage through the Utility by clicking Connect in B s Utility NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 3 IfA does not disconnect the USB storage B should click Request to Connect in the Utility to request A to disconnect B cannot access the USB storage until A disconnects e See Chapter 14 on page 119 for more details on connecting to USB storage by the Utility NBG4615 User s Guide 235 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting NBG4615 User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the NBG4615 s hardware and firmware features Table 91 Hardware Features Dimensions 162 mm W x 106 mm D x 28 mm H Weight 285g SDRAM 32 MB Flash Memory 8 MB Power Specification Input 100 240 AC 50 60 Hz Output 12 V DC 1 5A Ethernet ports Auto negotiating 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables Built in Switch You can use either straight through or crossover Ethernet cables MDI MDI X supp
165. al AP has its own SSID wireless security type and MAC filtering settings That is each SSID on the NBG4615 represents a different access point wireless network to wireless clients in the network Clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings Clients using different SSIDs can access the Internet and the wired network behind the NBG4615 such as a printer You can allow communication between wireless clients of different SSIDs in the Network gt Wireless LAN gt General screen See Section 15 2 on page 128 for more information NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials For example you may set up three wireless networks A B and C in your office A is for workers B is for guests and C is specific to a VoIP device in the meeting room 7 C E 7 SSID VoIP B 14 4 1 Configuring Security Settings of Multiple SSIDs The NBG4615 is in access point mode by default If you want to use multiple SSIDs when the NBG4615 is in universal repeater mode see Chapter 11 on page 82 for how to set the NBG4615 to universal repeater mode This example shows you how to configure the SSIDs with the following parameters on your NBG4615 in access point mode SSID SECURITY TYPE KEY MAC FILTERING SSID Worker WPA2 PSK DoNotStealMyWirelessNet Disable work WPA Compatible SSID Guest Static WEP 128bit keyexample123 Disable SSID VoIP WPA PSK VoIPOnly12345678 Allow
166. allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier DUID which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendor assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number registered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device 16 2 The IPv6 Screen Click Network gt I Pv6 to open the IPv6 screen Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your NBG4615 3 n IPv6 all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 16 IPv6 16 2 1 IPv6 Connection Ethernet If you select Ethernet as the IPv6 Connection Type the following screen displays Figure 91 Network gt IPv6 Connection Type WAN IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address Subnet Prefix Length Gateway IP Address First DNS Server Second DNS Server LAN IPv6 Address Setup LAN IPv6 address Address Autoconfiguration Type Address start Address end LAN IPv6 Link local Address Vv Enable Address Autoconfiguration Router Advertisement Lifetime IPv6 Ethernet D RR IPv6 Connection Type Setup Ethernet m 2001 db8 feed b01 2 2001 db8 feed b01 1 2001 db8 feed b00 f
167. anagement WWW Figure 129 Management gt Remote Management gt WWW WWW Server Port Bp Server Access fan v Secured Client IP Address Al C Selected pooo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Management Remote Management WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG4615 using this service Secured Client IP Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG4615 Address Otherwise check Selected and specify the IP address of the computer that can access the NBG4615 Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 206 NBG4615 User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP 28 1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automat
168. andwidth 129 H hidden node 293 HTTP 203 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 203 IANA 260 IBSS 291 IEEE 802 11g 295 IGMP 151 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 151 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 291 initialization vector IV 300 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 260 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 151 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 IP Address 165 174 IP alias 164 IP Pool 168 IPv6 309 addressing 143 309 EUI 64 311 global address 310 interface ID 311 link local address 309 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 309 ping 309 prefix 143 309 prefix length 143 309 stateless autoconfiguration 143 unspecified address 310 J Java 193 NBG4615 User s Guide Index L LAN 163 IP pool setup 164 LAN overview 163 LAN setup 163 LAN TCP IP 164 Language 221 Link type 71 79 86 94 103 local user database 127 and encryption 128 Local Area Network 163 MAC 135 MAC address 126 150 cloning 150 MAC address filter 126 MAC address filtering 135 MAC filter 135 managing the device good habits 22 using the web configurator See web configurator using the WPS See WPS MBSSID 21 Media access control 135 Memory usage 71 79 85 93 103 Message Integrity Check MIC 299 mode 21 Multicast 151 IGMP 151 N NAT 171 174 260 global 172 how it works 173 inside 172 local 172 outside 172 overview 171 port forwarding 177 see also Network Address Translation serve
169. anying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court j
170. arameters SSID Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless devices is called Selection a channel The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference Security Mode Select No Security in this field NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode Table 39 No Security WISP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 12 5 1 Static WEP Use this screen if the access point to which you want to connect to uses WEP security mode Figure 67 WEP WISP General Site Survey i WISP Parameters SSID _ I Channel Selection Channel o1 2412MHz v Security Mode Static WEP v PassPhrase D Generate WEP Encryption sets v Encryption Type Shared Key v Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission Asci CHEX Key 1 D CKey2 Si Ckey3 D Ckey 4 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 WEP WISP LABEL DESCRIPTION WISP Parameters SSID Enter
171. art Click Restart to have the NBG4615 reboot This does not affect the NBG4615 s configuration 29 9 System Operation Mode Overview The Sys OP Mode System Operation Mode function lets you configure your NBG4615 as an access point wireless client or both at the same time You can choose between Router Access Point Mode Universal Repeater Mode and WISP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device The following describes the device modes available in your NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance Router A router connects your local network with another network such as the Internet The router has two IP addresses the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address Figure 147 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode LAN WAN INTERNEJ iii Access Point An access point enabled all ethernet ports to be bridged together and be in the same subnet To connect to the Internet another device such as a router is required Figure 148 Access Point Mode LAN CD 222 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance Universal Repeater NBG4615 in Universal Repeater mode work as an access point and wireless client simultaneously Figure 149 Universal Repeater Mode WISP A WISP client connects to an existing access point wirelessly It acts just like a wireless client in notebooks computers Figure 150 IP Address in WISP Mode Wireless Client
172. ateway address e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address e In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided fe Netwonesernnge E E B Location Connections l General DNS Hosts DNS Servers F Add w Delete F Add w Delete P Help s unock Close 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes Search Domains NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System Administration Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 175 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Mc Devices Network Jools eben ub 3a Tool Edit Help Devices Ping Netstat Traceroute Port Scan Lookup Finger whois Network d
173. ating from the NBG4615 does not get a response from the gateway The same rule applies to the line connecting the gateway to the Internet You can also view the devices represented by icons indicating the kind of network device connected to the NBG4615 including those connecting wirelessly Right click on the NBG4615 icon to refresh the network map and go to the Wizard Right click on the other icons to view information about the device 8 6 Control Panel The features configurable in Easy Mode are shown in the Control Panel Figure 34 Control Panel Game Power Content s Bl Bandwidth AY Firewal Wireless d Engine 4 Saving mx Filter MGMT j Firewall A Security ON OFF fo ON ON Switch ON to enable the feature Otherwise switch OFF If the feature is turned on the green light flashes If it is turned off the red light flashes Additionally click the feature to open a screen where you can edit its settings The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Control Panel ITEM DESCRIPTION Game Engine Switch ON to maximize bandwidth for gaming traffic in your network Otherwise switch OFF Refer to Section 8 6 1 on page 61 to see this screen Power Saving Click this to schedule the wireless feature of the NBG4615 Disabling the wireless function helps lower the energy consumption of the NBG4615 Switch ON to apply wireless scheduling Otherwise switch OFF Refer to Section 8 6 2 on p
174. atisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables
175. ave window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b g gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection see the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide TENS gt Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps Network Name SSID SSID Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps gt AP MAC Address 00 A0 C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None gt Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11g gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 gt Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 gt Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength 0 6 Link Quality 9000900 0 O If your connection is successful open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured 14 4 Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG4615 You can configure more than one SSID on a NBG4615 when it is operating in access point or universal repeater mode This allows you to configure multiple independent wireless networks on the NBG4615 as if there were multiple APs virtual APs Each virtu
176. ay IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP from ISP Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4615 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the Second DNS Server read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG4615 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default
177. bled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 28 3 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP on your NBG4615 Click Management UPnP to display the screen shown next Figure 130 Management gt UPnP General UPnP Setup Device Name ZyXEL NBG4615 Internet Sharing Gateway v Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 84 Management gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal Plug Select this check box to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could and Play UPnP Feature use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the NBG4615 s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 28 4 Technical Reference The sections show examples of using UPnP 28 4 1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG4615 Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG4615 Turn on your computer and the NBG4615 28 4 1 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click start and Control Panel Doubl
178. cannot be browsed Add Key Word Add Delete Example 1 Example2 Example 3 Cappy Ceancer The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Content Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed Note The NBG4615 does not recognize wildcard characters as keywords When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Delete Highlight a keyword in the text box and click Delete to remove it The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to close this screen without saving any changes 8 6 4 Bandwidth MGMT Use this screen to set bandwidth allocation to pre defined services and applications for bandwidth allocation NBG4615 User s Guide e Chapter 8 Easy Mode The NBG4615 uses bandwidth management for incoming and outgoing traffic Rank the services and applications by dragging them accordingly from High to Low and click Apply Click Cancel to close the screen Figure 38 Bandwidth MGNT afl Bandwidth MGMT Drag the sliders to adjust the bandwidth for each network application amp 8 Game Console to drag the item z to drag the items according to how you want to Web Surfing p
179. cifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to log into the wireless network Keep this setting at Open unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the NBG4615 occurs Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication WEP Key Title WEPKey Default Select a default WEP key to use for data encryption WEP Key 1 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG4615 and the access point WEP Key 4 must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose HEX enter 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters in the range of A F a f and 0 9 for example 11AA22BB33 for a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP key respectively If you chose ASCII enter any 5 or 13 ASCII characters case sensitive ranging from a z A Z and 0 9 for example MyKey for a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP key respectively You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Table 35 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater Static WEP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 11 6 3 WPA 2 PSK Figure 59 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater WPA 2 PSK General Sec
180. ck Apply Select DNS Relay to have the NBG4615 act as a DNS proxy The NBG4615 s LAN IP address displays in the field to the right read only The NBG4615 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG4615 itself is the DNS server When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG4615 the NBG4615 forwards the query to the NBG4615 s system DNS server configured in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen and relays the response back to the computer You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server that choice changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 170 NBG4615 User s Guide NAT 20 1 Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet For example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network You want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address o
181. cked Select this check box to enable this feature NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 25 Content Filtering Table 77 Security gt Content Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 64 characters Wildcards are not allowed You can also enter a numerical IP address Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply Clear All Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4615 features described in this chapter 25 3 1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a website s URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default
182. cket Statistics Click Details to go to the Monitor Packet Statistics screen Section 6 6 on page 53 Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Click Details to go to the Monitor WLAN Station Status screen Section 6 7 on page 54 Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG4615 port types The port types are LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed or N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled 11 5 0 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4615 features in Universal Repeater mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in Universal Repeater mode Figure 56 Menu Universal Repeater Mode MONITOR CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE open all close all open all c a open all close alll Monitor Network Maintenance Packet Statistics IPv6 LAN Refer to Table 30 on page 72 for descriptions of the labels shown in the Navigation panel 11 6 Universal Repeater Screen Use this screen to ent
183. cket when the neighbor is reachable If the NBG4615 cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable it starts the address resolution process This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from IPv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses ICMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router or switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port shoul
184. cking the Tools gt Auto Connect Printer List menu command Note If the computer is connecting to the shared USB printer for the first time you need to click Connect and setup the printer before you can use the Auto Connect Printer function See Chapter 14 on page 121 for more details NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Figure 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto Connect Printer List Window F4 auto Connect Printer List 1 x Server IP amp Printer Name 192 168 1 1 HP Deskjet F2400 series HP Deskjet F2400 series oe The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto Connect Printer List Window LABEL DESCRIPTION Server IP amp Printer Displays a list of print server IPs and printer names connected to this Name NBG4615 Windows Printer Name Displays a corresponding list of Windows printer names connected to this devices listed in the other list Delete Close Select an printer from the list and click this to remove it Click this to close the window 3 2 4 Exit the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility If you want to exit the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility when your computer is not connected to any USB device follow the steps below 1 Click System gt Exit on the Utility screen The Utility will automatically close z ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center System Tools Abou
185. clicking Applications Utilities Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network I nterface from the I nfo tab Figure 173 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility eoe Network Utility i info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan iaterface for information Network Interface en0 i Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e Sent Packets 20607 IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Mb Recv Packets 22626 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Marvell Collisions 0 Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 278 1 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 but can also apply to 10 6 Click Apple System Preferences Finder File Edit Viev About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software QUEE LLL System Preferences Bie TN Recent Items b Force Quit X389 Sleep Restart Shut Down NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon Personal c ow M B uU o Q Appearance Desktop amp Expos amp International Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Saver Mouse Internet amp N B Mac Network QuickTime Sharing System 2 Q 9 9 i Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Unive
186. cluding mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution NBG4615 User s Guide 307 Appendix F Common Services NBG4615 User s Guide IPv6 Overview IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 10 8 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1la2f 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways
187. containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself NBG4615 User s Guide 347 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the
188. continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default Password 1234 DHCP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Wireless Interface Wireless LAN Default Wireless SSID ZyXEL Device Management Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the NBG4615 Wireless Functionality Allows IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g and or IEEE 802 11n wireless clients to connect to the NBG4615 wirelessly Enable wireless security WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Note The NBG4615 may be prone to RF Radio Frequency interference from other 2 4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens wireless phones Bluetooth enabled devices and other wireless LANs Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup amp Restoration Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG4615 Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Make a copy of the NBG4615 s configuration and put it back on the NBG4615 later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Firewall You can configure firewall on the NBG4615 for secure Internet access When the firewall is on by default all incoming traffic from the
189. d Operating This displays the channel the NBG4615 is currently using Channel Communication between wireless clients with different SSIDs Select the check box to allow communication between wireless clients of different SSIDs Do not select the check box if you do not want to enable this function Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen 15 3 Wireless Security Screen Use this screen to select the wireless security mode for each SSID Click Network Wireless LAN gt Security to open the Security screen The screen varies depending on what you select in the Security Mode field 15 3 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless clients to communicate with the access points without any data encryption Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4615 your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 81 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security No Security General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Security SSID ZyXEL Security Mode wo Security Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WP S enabled App Cance The following table describes
190. d on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions NBG4615 User s Guide EN Appendix H Open Software Announcements a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License C If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you m
191. d remain in the group NBG4615 User s Guide 313 Appendix G IPv6 Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista By default Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable IPv6 This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated IP addresses C gt ipv install Installing Succeeded C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix TP AGAY SS Sie feos x Hae es oe ee een ous wr MO a6 Subnet Mask wwe Se gt a ee ah ee a PS 29525040 IP Address fe80 2d0 59ff feb8 103c 4 Default Gateway 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Example Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP 1 2 3 Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer Install Dibbler and
192. data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accomp
193. ddress and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to configuration file It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN 17 3 2 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Figure 95 Multicast Example Server In the multicast example above systems A and D comprise one multicast group In multicasting the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data The NBG4615 supports both IGMP version 1 I GMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the NBG4615 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the NBG4615 periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the NBG4615 LAN and or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 17 4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change your NBG4615 s Internet access setti
194. de Chapter 14 Tutorials 1 After the first computer A finishes using the USB device click Disconnect on the Utilty to unmount it 2 Click Connect on the Utility of the second computer B to mount the USB device on B 3 IfA does not disconnect from the USB device B cannot use it B can click the Request to Connect button to request A to disconnect B will see the following message on its Utility Please wait for the reply II Request to connect device II Remote User TEST BFO7096256 Server NBG4515 182 168 1 1 Device MassStorage USB Flash Disk e C e Cancel e II Remote User request to connect device Remote User X31 F205709BF5D 192 168 1 39 Server NBG4615 192 168 1 1 Device Mass Storage USB Flash Disk Note Click Accept will disconnect the device right now 5 A should click Accept to disconnect to the USB device 6 After A is disconnected from USB device B will see the following message on its Utility Now B can access the USB device F2 Got the reply IIl Connected device successfully Remote User TEST BFO7096256 Server NBG4615 182 168 1 1 Device Mass Storage USB Flash Disk E ydy L Note If your computer is connected to a USB device you must disconnect it and use Exit to close the Utility If you use the X on the Utility screen it only closes the Utility window The Utility is still connected Do not exit the Utility until the USB device is disconn
195. disable WPS view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS tab NBG4615 User s Guide 137 Chapter 15 Wireless LAN Note With WPS wireless clients can only connect to the wireless network using the first SSID on the NBG4615 Figure 87 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS General Security WPS Setup IV Enable WPS PIN Number Status Status 802411 Mode SSID Security MAC Filter Advanced WDS QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling 05921287 Generate Configured Release Configuration 11 bigin ZyXEL wWPA2 PSK cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable WPS Select this to enable the WPS feature PIN Number This displays a PIN number last time system generated Click Generate to generate a new PIN number Status Status This displays Configured when the NBG4615 has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG4615 or you click Release_ Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless
196. dress An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6 addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated Unlike DHCPv6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration the owner and status of addresses don t need to be maintained by a DHCP server Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface It combines the prefix and the interface ID generated from its own Ethernet MAC address to form a complete IPv6 address NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 16 IPv6 When IPv6 is enabled on a device its interface automatically generates a link local address beginning with fe80 When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the NBG4615 is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface it generates another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router This is a routable global IP address DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 is a server client protocol that
197. e destination cache prefix list and default router list The NBG4615 maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages In IPv6 the NBG4615 configures a link local address automatically and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique If there is an address to be resolved or verified the NBG4615 also sends out a neighbor solicitation message When the NBG4615 receives a neighbor advertisement in response it stores the neighbor s link layer address in the neighbor cache When the NBG4615 uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message it adds the router s information to the neighbor cache prefix list and destination cache The NBG4615 creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router When the NBG4615 needs to send a packet it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop If there is no matching entry in the destination cache the NBG4615 uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on link and can be reached directly without passing through a router If the address is unlink the address is considered as the next hop Otherwise the NBG4615 determines the next hop from the default router list or routing table Once the next hop IP address is known the NBG4615 looks into the neighbor cache to get the link layer address and sends the pa
198. e In Access Point Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address e All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports including the port labeled WAN There is no WAN port e The DHCP server on your device is disabled e The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 2 Universal Repeater Mode Select Universal Repeater Mode if you want to have wireless clients associate with the NBG4615 and also want to connect the NBG4615 to an existing access point e In addition to wireless LAN settings between the NBG4615 and wireless clients you also need to configure security and wireless settings between the NBG4615 and another access point e WDS is not available when the NBG4615 is in Universal Repeater Mode e The IP address of the device on the local network is the same as the IP address given to the NBG4615 while in Access Point Mode default is 192 168 1 2 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance Table 90 Maintenance Sys OP Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WISP Mode Select WI SP Mode if your device needs a wireless client to connect to an existing access point e You cannot configure Wireless LAN settings including WPS and scheduling in the WI SP Mode e The IP address of the device on the local network is the same as the IP address given to the NBG4615 while in router mode default is 192 168 1 1 Apply Click Apply to save your setting
199. e NBG4615 to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG4615 tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG4615 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields 2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the NBG4615 s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address Otherwise click Clone the computer s MAC address I P A
200. e changes and close the Network Card Setup window NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided YaST2 linux h20z Enter the name for a Network Settings this computer and the DNS domain that it j belongs to Global Options Overview Hostname DNS J Routing Optionally enter the m Hostname and Domain Name name server list and Hostname Domain Name domain search list linux h2oz site Note that the _ Change Hostname via DHCP _ Write Hostname to etc hosts hostname is global it applies to all interfaces not just this one X Change etc resolv conf manually Name Servers and Domain Search List The domain is Name Server 1 Domain Search especially important if 10 0 2 3 this computer is a mail server Name Server 2 If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your host which can be _ Update DNS data via DHCP seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect 4 to different networks Name Server 3 vj 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window Verifying Settings
201. e click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 131 Network Connections Network Connections File Qs Q B JO search E Folders E Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Address amp amp Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Rename this connection View status of this connection E Change settings of this rannertian Disable LANorH Status Create Shortcut E all Rename Properties In the Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Figure 132 Internet Connection Properties Y Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Show icon in notification area when connected NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 133 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Serv
202. e n QUEE eta 205 PAP SD sit POY arto 206 Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play U PIP vocccncessencncesssveisassccserecxnevaxqusinssevciuorstsessevenss soeadnasscuneuensossoncadednatersras 207 ey necausemsusdd eM Mu UNI EMI dada I D DIEM ICM KD ILLE PUES U 207 28 2 What rou Need To KOOW aiecocccasase tubos puiec tente khi Im bance Ue t bbco mte ez On e eb cc a E P Les M ELEC MMED DR ORAS EE 207 NBG4615 User s Guide 15 Table of Contents EB A Wea Sal esses vansannqiiedsaxdnnas xdasecu dp bec Na DRE Y Rb UDA Vp Aa bo p URS Md Ada UR Ra 207 Eg s C Une ID E siase daoias based aaa sad eaaa alone ub Darko ducissa RS Eaa 207 ANI udo eee 208 283 Vie IRI aU Feli EE ooa cb DART REED b RE E roa c DR A E UNA RENI se 208 204 1 Using IPE in Windows AP Example uc qusdetete teen tent ene esteteti d dn emi esten bete acts 208 2841 2 Web L onfigurator Easy ACCESS ceuicectoueiecsseniisec e ptutix tcn neta copa bleu inte etr Dbu ene E Casu aM DE EE d Red 211 Chapter 29 L jji CE A 215 TE OC MORTE D I I E aniets 215 292 What YoU CAN DO e 215 2905 GE al EE arara E O 215 E94 E eL 1e a E E E Ua lem E E E E E T 216 209 5 Time Seng NN srren a EA a E E hedeneg aueetie ncaa eee ate 217 29 6 Firmware Upgrade GERI gaiiera a in 219 29 7 Donfiguration Backup Restores SoreB sssrinin a eean tud Eer 220 29 8 esor Rastari SOFEBIT riitta itsin AAAS E aeta
203. e object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License you may not market co brand and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party software as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party and makes no warranty express implied or statutory whatsoever with respect thereto Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to
204. e ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free lib
205. e service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber s site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4615 rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG4615 does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have Internet access Figure 11 Internet Connection Type PPPoE 1 Internet Connection Type PPPoE v Please refer to the ir folloy jJlanks SDynamic IP Sstatic IP IP Address 0 0 0 0 User Name pppoe user Anz 0 Password 36 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table8 Internet Connection Type PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Select the PPPoE option for a dial up connection Connection Type Dynamic IP Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Static IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the NBG4615 a fixed unique IP address IP Address Type the name of your service provider User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the user name above Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without savin
206. e smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 9 Java E d Use Java 2141 0T for enol eques esi gt 2 v1 4 1 07 for d Use Java 2141 0T for enol eques esi gt requires restart 5 Microso v B Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Restore Defaults Apply Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary slightly The steps below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3 0 as well You can enable Java Javascript and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 162 Mozilla Firefox TOOLS gt Options IEEE Help Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctr 3 Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Ctrii ShifE A Page Info FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options i Session Manager NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 163 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Bod 4 Se
207. e the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point Section 10 5 on page 80 e Use the Wireless LAN screen to associate your NBG4615 acting as a wireless client with an existing access point Section 12 5 on page 95 13 3 What You Need to Know The Monitor Configuration and Maintenance screens in WISP UR mode are similar to the ones in Router mode See Chapter 15 on page 125 through Chapter 29 on page 224 of this User s Guide NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 13 WISP UR Mode 13 3 1 Setting your NBG4615 to WISP UR Mode 1 Log into the Web Configurator if you haven t already See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this 2 To set your NBG4615 to WISP UR Mode Mode go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General and select WI SP UR Mode Figure 71 Changing to WISP UR mode Sys OP Mode Configuration Mode C Router Mode C Access Point Mode o Universal Repeater Mode C wisP Mode C wisp UR Mode Note Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network Universal Repeater Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client It can transmit wireless traffic between two wireless networks
208. e the power LED is on 2 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart reboot the NBG4615 3 Press the RESET button for longer than 5 seconds to set the NBG4615 back to its factory default configurations NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator NBG4615 User s Guide Monitor 6 1 Overview This chapter discusses read only information related to the device state of the NBG4615 To access the Monitor screens go to Expert Mode after login then click ud Click open all to show the complete menu ZyXEL NBG4615 MONITOR open all close all k amp Monitor ME LOO BW MGMT Monitor Pas Packet Statistics WLAN Station Status You can also click the links in the Summary table of the Status screen to view the bandwidth consumed packets sent received as well as the status of clients connected to the NBG4615 6 2 What You Can Do e Use the Log screen to see the logs for the activity on the NBG4615 Section 6 3 on page 49 e Use the BW MGMT Monitor screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using Section 6 4 on page 51 e Use the DHCP Table screen to view information related to your DHCP status Section 6 5 on page 51 e use the Packet Statistics screen to view port status packet specific statistics the system up time and so on Section 6 6 on page 53 Use the WLAN Station Status screen to view the wirele
209. e this A Local Area Connection Wireless Network Connection ae _ Unidentified network y i ZyXEL_RT3062_AP1 4 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth ill 802 11n Wirel SB Adapter General Connection IPv4 Connectivity No network access IPv6 Connectivity No network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Sent As Received Packets 432 0 Goa ee Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue 272 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Networking Connect using D Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items 9l Client for Microsoft Networks vl fil QoS Packet Scheduler ivi Be File and iden ni for Microsoft Networks Link Layer pem Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver v Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder m NN Descnption Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks NBG4615 User s Guide 273 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Thelnternet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens General You can get IP settings assign
210. ecify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off depending on what you selected in the WLAN Status field This field works in conjunction with the Day and For the following times fields Day Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days This field works in conjunction with the For the following times field For the following Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute min drop down times 24 Hour boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute min Format drop down boxes If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields In this time format midnight is 00 00 and progresses up to 24 00 For example 6 00 PM is 18 00 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8 6 3 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict access to certain websites based on keywords contained in URLs to which you do not want users in your network to open Figure 37 Content Filter Content Filter x Any URLs that contains any of the following keywords will be blocked and
211. econnect the USB device to the NBG4615 and try to connect to it again with your computer 7 Ifthe problem persists contact your vendor What kind of USB devices do the NBG4615 support NBG4615 User s Guide 233 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 1 It is strongly recommended to use version 2 0 or lower USB storage devices such as memory sticks USB hard drives and or USB devices such as USB printers Other USB products are not guaranteed to function properly with the NBG4615 30 8 ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG4615 1 Disconnect the problematic USB device then reconnect it to the NBG4615 2 Ensure that the USB device in question has power 3 Check your cable connections 4 Restart the NBG4615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it 5 Ifthe USB device requires a special driver install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device After driver installation reconnect the USB device to the NBG4615 and try to connect to it again with your computer 6 If the problem persists contact your vendor I cannot install the ZyXEL Share Center Utility 1 Make sure that the set up program is one required for your operating system 2 Install the latest patches and updates for your operating system 3 Check the zyxel com download site for a newer version of the utility Two computers cannot connect the USB stor
212. ect CA MFP HP Deskjet F2400 series NBG4615 User s Guide 121 Chapter 14 Tutorials 6 Select the USB printer you want to connect to and click Apply FJ add to Auto Connect Printer List loj x lt Installed Printer List gt Printer Name v HP Deskjet F2400 series recommended nn ce 7 Now your computer can automatically connect to this shared USB printer over your NBG4615 network each time you log into your computer The printer will be automatically added to your printer list 8 The Utility supports one connection to the NBG4615 s USB device at a time If more than one computer is using the printer and are all auto connected to the USB device the second computer automatically starts printing after the first computer finishes its printing task NBG4615 User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference Wireless LAN 15 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG4615 See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 77 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B are called wireless clients The wireless clients use the access point AP to interact with other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your NBG4615 is the AP
213. ect to the contents of the Your products and any intellectual property rights or other rights or interests related thereto 8 High Risk Activities NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements The Original Code is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Original Code could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage GoAhead and its suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any high risk uses listed above 9 Government Restricted Rights For units of the Department of Defense use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Contractor manufacturer is GoAhead Software Inc 10900 N E 8th Street Suite 750 Bellevue Washington 98004 If the Commercial Computer Software Restricted rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 or its successors apply the Software and Documentation constitute restricted computer software as defined in that clause and the Government shall not have
214. ect to the existing AP or wireless router through the NBG4615 set the NBG4615 to Universal Repeater mode and then associate the NBG4615 with the AP or wireless router The NBG4615 must be within the transmission range of the AP or wireless router 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 using an Ethernet cable 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192 168 1 2 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows Type cmd in the dialog box Enter ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 263 for information on changing your computer s IP address 4 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http 192 168 1 2 as the web address in your web browser 5 Enter 1234 default as the password and click Login 6 Type anew password and retype it to confirm then click Apply Otherwise click Ignore 7 The Easy mode appears Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel NBG4615 User s Guide ns Chapter 14 Tutorials 8 Onthe left of the screen click Maintenance Sys OP Mode and select Universal Repeater Mode Click Apply The NBG4615 restarts Sys OP Mode Configuration Mode C Router Mode C Access Point Mode Universal Repeater Mode wisp Mode wisp UR
215. ected via the Utility or until you receive a request to disconnect See Chapter 3 on page 30 for details on how to exit the Utility NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 14 7 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer Your computer can connect to a shared USB printer by using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility This tutorial shows you how to set your computer to automatically connect to a shared USB printer over your NBG4615 network each time you log into your computer 1 Install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility to your computer See Chapter 3 on page 26 for details on the installation 2 Connect a USB printer to one of the USB ports of the NBG4615 3 Open the ZyXEL NetUSB Sharing Center Utility on your computer The name of the USB printer automatically shows in the Utility screen 4 Click on the printer name Then click Connect Your computer will search for the printer driver You may be prompted to install the driver Follow the driver s installation steps to finish installing F42yXEL NetUSB Share Center E loj xj System Tools About 5 NBG4615 192 168 1 1 eA MFP HP Deskjet F2400 series X 5 Click the Auto Connect Printer menu and select Set Auto Connect Printer from the menu FA 2yXEL NetUSB Share Center System Tools About o a P o E ure Auto Connect Connect Disconnect F to Network E Printer Gt Scanner ofe Set Auto Connect Printer Printer ww Delete Auto nn
216. ection Type L2TP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Static IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the NBG4615 a fixed unique IP address L2TP Address Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP L2TP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given L2TP Gateway IP Type the gateway IP address of the L2TP server Address L2TP Server IP Type the server IP address of the L2TP server Address User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving Back Click this to return to the previous screen Next Click this to continue The NBG4615 connects to the Internet Figure 14 Connecting to the Internet Note If the Wizard successfully connects to the Internet it proceeds to the next step If you get an error message go back to the previous screen and make sure you have entered the correct information provided by your ISP NBG4615 User s Guide 39 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 4 Router Password Change the login password in the following screen Enter the new password and retype it to confirm Click Next to proceed with the Wireless Security screen Figure 15 Router Password ry default one Password Verify Password 4 5 Wireless Security Configure Wireless Settings Configure the wirel
217. ed automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 7 Obtain an IP address automatically IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server E Validate settings upon exit Advanced a 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 274 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows t sipconfig Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but
218. ed printer NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3 2 2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Configuration Window This section describes the utility s configuration window which allows you to set certain options for the utility These options do not apply to the USB devices connected to the NBG4615 You can open it by clicking the Tools Configuration menu command Figure 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window Fa netuse Share Center Configuration Basic IV automatically execute when logging on windows Language Chinese Traditional Deutsch Francais Italiano Espanol Note Language setting will take effect on next execution The following table describes the labels in this window Table 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Select this to run the utility automatically when you log into or start up Windows Language Select a language for the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility You must restart the utility for the change to take effect OK Click this to save your changes and close the window Cancel Click this cancel to close the window without saving Apply Click this to save your changes without closing the window 3 2 3 The Auto Connect Printer List Window This section describes the utility s auto connect printer list window You can open it by cli
219. ed to the host with a specified internal IP address Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry Service Name Type a name of up to 31 printable characters to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name Otherwise select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name The predefined service name and port number s will display in the Service Name and Port fields Port Enter the start and end port s to be forwarded Server IP Address Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port s specified in the Port field Application Rules Summary This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry Active This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled Name This field displays a name to identify this rule Port This field displays the port number s Server IP Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server Modify Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule Click the Remove icon to delete a rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide 175 Chapter 20 NAT 20 4 Advanced To change your NBG4615 s trigger port settings click Network NAT Advanced
220. el Selection Operating Channel Channel 06 2437MHz ri Communication between wireless clients with different SSIDs Apply Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 45 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN This shows whether the wireless LAN is ON or OFF You can enable or disable the wireless LAN by using the WLAN switch located on the back panel of the NBG4615 Network The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the Service Set with which a wireless Name SSID client is associated Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable characters found on a typical English language keyboard for the wireless LAN You can configure up to four SSIDs to enable multiple BSSs Basic Service Sets on the NBG4615 This allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously You can then assign varying security types to different SSIDs Wireless clients can use different SSIDs to associate with the same access point Hide Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enable Intra BSS Traffic A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BS
221. er the SSID and select the wireless security mode used by the wireless device to which you want to connect Go to Configuration gt Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater to open the Universal Repeater screen The screen varies depending on security mode NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Note To have wireless clients access or acquire an IP address from another access point or wireless router B through the NBG4615 A in universal repeater mode you must set the channel number in the Wireless LAN gt General screen to be the same as the one on the wireless router or AP to which the NBG4615 wants to connect Channel x Channel x CD PEE 11 6 1 No Security Figure 57 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN Universal Repeater No Security General Security MACFilter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling Universal Repeater Universal Repeater Parameters M Enable SSID o MAC Address Optional o Security Mode No Security v Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Universal Repeater Parameters Enable Select this option to have the NBG4615 connect to the specified access point SSID Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the access point to which
222. ervices screen enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them Section 24 3 on page 189 24 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter NBG4615 User s Guide 187 Chapter 24 Firewall 188 What is a Firewall Originally the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another The networking term firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access control policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted Of course firewalls cannot solve every security problem A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy It should never be the only mechanism or method employed For a firewall to guard effectively you must design and deploy it appropriately This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information security policy In addition specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the integrity of the connec
223. es not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server If the default is not defined the service request is simply discarded Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 20 5 2 NAT Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 113 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example LAN WAN A 192 168 1 33 g 192 168 1 1 C 192 168 1 35 NBG4615 User s Guide 177 Chapter 20 NAT 20 5 3 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a dif
224. ess Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the computer s Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP MAC address IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Address Set WAN MAC Address Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 4 4 L2TP Encapsulation The Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP works at layer 2 the data link layer to tunnel network traffic between two peer devices over another network like the Internet NBG4615 User s Guide 157 Chapter 17 WAN This screen displays when you select L2TP encapsulation Figure 99 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection L2TP Encapsulation menercoresios 450r on 5 WNNEREEREEEEEERERRRNN ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation L2TP X User Name D Password D Retype to Confirm L L2TP Configuration Server IP Address Get automatically from ISP Use Fixed IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP C Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server From ISP gt Second DNS Server From ISP X WAN MAC Address io Factory defau
225. ess This shows the WAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port s subnet mask Default Gateway This shows the WAN port s gateway IP address DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Server or Disable WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 s wireless LAN is set WISP Mode MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN ON or OFF Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN Connect Status This shows whether or not the NBG4615 has successfully associated with an access point Associated or Disassociated Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard System Status Item Data This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 System Up Time Current Date Time This is the total time the
226. ess Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG4615 and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x RADIUS In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is Supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users e Authorization Determines the
227. ess in this field if you selected Use Fixed I P Address Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4615 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS Second DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address Address by using the NBG4615 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning address IP Address Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address
228. ess network settings on your NBG4615 in the following screen The fields that show up depend on the kind of security you select 4 5 1 Wireless Security No Security Choose No Security in the Wireless Security screen to let wireless devices within range access your wireless network Figure 16 Wireless Security No Security A prote wirelessly sua Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL Security mode NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Wireless Security No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless Network LAN Name SSID If you change this field on the NBG4615 make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Security mode Select a Security level from the drop down list box Choose No Security to have no wireless LAN security configured If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4615 your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving Back Click this to return to the previous screen Next Click this to continue 4 5 2 Wireless Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security in the Wireless Security screen to set up a password for your wireless network Figure 17 W
229. estore your last configuration 1 5 LEDs Figure 1 Front Panel LAN 1 4 WAN USB 1 2 Power WLAN WPS The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button Table1 Front panel LEDs and WPS button LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Power Green On The NBG4615 is receiving power and functioning properly Off The NBG4615 is not receiving power LAN 1 4 Green On The NBG4615 s LAN connection is ready Blinking The NBG4615 is sending receiving data through the LAN with a 10 100Mbps transmission rate Amber Blinking The NBG4615 is sending receiving data through the LAN with a 1000Mbps transmission rate Off The LAN connection is not ready or has failed 22 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 Front panel LEDs and WPS button continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION WAN Green On The NBG4615 s WAN connection is ready Blinking The NBG4615 is sending receiving data through the WAN with a 10 100Mbps transmission rate Amber Blinking The NBG4615 is sending receiving data through the WAN with a 1000Mbps transmission rate Off The WAN connection is not ready or has failed WLAN WPS Green On The NBG4615 is ready but is not sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Blinking The NBG4615 is sending receiving data through the wireless LAN The NBG4615 is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client Off The wireless LAN is not re
230. eting and promotional materials such as the home page of your web site or web pages promoting the product 4 3 Placement of Copyright Notice by You You agree to include copies of the following notice the Notice regarding proprietary rights in all copies of the products that You distribute as follows i embedded in the object code and ii on the title pages of all documentation Furthermore You agree to use commercially reasonable efforts to cause any licensees of your products to embed the Notice in object code and on the title pages or relevant documentation The Notice is as follows Copyright c 20xx GoAhead Software Inc All Rights Reserved Unless GoAhead otherwise instructs the year 20xx is to be replaced with the year during which the release of the Original Code containing the notice is issued by GoAhead If this year is not supplied with Documentation GoAhead will supply it upon request 4 4 No Modifications to Server Identification Field You agree not to remove or modify the Server identification Field contained in the Response Header as defined in Section 1 6 and 1 7 5 Warranty Disclaimers THE ORIGINAL CODE THE DOCUMENTATION AND THE MEDIA UPON WHICH THE ORIGINAL CODE IS RECORDED IF ANY ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EXPRESS STATUTORY OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE The entire risk as to the qua
231. evice 3i Configure IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPv4 10 0 2 15 255 255 255 0 10 0 2 255 IPv6 fe80 a00 27ff fe30 el6c 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e1 6c sremitied sytes 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors 0 Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KiB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 mm Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click K Menu Computer Administrator Settings YaST Ka seach iri F3 Applications a Administrator Settings Install Software System Information 1 f System Folders Home Folder 2 My Documents Ev Network Folders A Media 2 46 Media 2 0 GB available xw wO Favorites App
232. f 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices A to D connected to your NBG4615 The ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet All traffic coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG4615 which is 192 168 1 1 Figure 108 NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 Ng S 192 168 1 ETP Telnet SNMP LAN WAN Ports 21 to 25 B 192 168 1 34 Port 80 I l l IP address i assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 35 2h J This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG4615 Note You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG4615 20 1 1 What You Can Do e Use the General screen to enable NAT and set a default server Section 20 2 on page 173 e Use the Application screen to change your NBG4615 s port forwarding settings Section 20 3 on page 174 NBG4615 User s Guide 171 Chapter 20 NAT e Use the Advanced screen to change your NBG4615 s trigger port settings Section 20 5 3 on page 178 20 1 2 What You Need To Know 172 The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Inside Outside This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG4615 for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
233. f the AP or wireless router in the field next to WLAN Station Status under Device I nformation Status Device Information Item Host Name Firmware Version Sys OP Mode LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode MAC Address Status Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode Interface Status Interface Data NBG4615 V1 00 BWOQ 0 BG 20100908 Universal Repeater Mode 00 E0 98 09 09 00 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 None Universal Repeater Mode 00 E0 98 09 09 00 ON ZyXEL Channel 05 2432MHz Channel 05 2432MHz No Security 802 11b g n Confiqured Ca Refresh Interval None v Refresh Now System Status Item Data System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage 096 Memory Usage 77 System Setting Configuration Mode 57 mins 47 secs 2000 01 01 00 58 08 Summary Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status D To check whether a wireless client is currently connecting to the NBG4615 click the WLAN Station Status Details hyperlink under Summary in the Status screen or Monitor WLAN Station Status See Chapter 6 on page 49 for more information Association List Association List f Association List Association Time 01 09 05 2000 01 01 MAC Address 00 19 CB 32 BE AC NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 14 6 C
234. feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS You must have a public WAN IP address NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 21 DDNS 21 2 General To change your NBG4615 s DDNS click Network DDNS The screen appears as shown Figure 115 Dynamic DNS General Dynamic DNS Setup Iv Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG x Host Name C User Name Loo Password L cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Enter a host names in the field provided You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma User Name Enter your user name Password Enter the password assigned to you Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Ed NBG4615 User s Guide Static Route 22 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG4615 Each remote node spec
235. fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by th
236. ferent LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The NBG4615 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the NBG4615 s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol incoming port the NBG4615 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application 20 5 4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding Figure 114 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Jane s computer Real Audio Server Port 7070 1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG4615 to record Jane s computer IP address The NBG4615 associates Jane s computer IP address with the incoming port range of 6970 7170 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 4 The NBG4615 forwards the traffic to Jane s computer
237. ffic Network Name SSID1 so Gust C uidelViEnable Intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID2 Esovoe Hide Enable intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID3 Fidel Enable intra BSS Traffic Channel Selection IV Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel ChanneLl 04 2427MHz IV Communication between wireless clients with different SSIDs Apply Cancel 9 Click the Security tab to configure security settings for each SSID Select SSID Worker from the SSID drop down list Configure the screen as follows Click Apply General Security i MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Security SSID SSID Worker v Security Mode WPA2 PSK iv WPA Compatible Pre Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork Group Key Update Timer 5600 seconds Note Only WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 10 Select SSID Guest from the SSI D drop down list Configure the screen as follows Click Apply General Security i MAC Filter Advanced Qos wes wes Station Security SSID SSD_Guest w Security Mode Static WEP v PassPhrase gt P WEP Encryption 128 bits v Authentication Method Shared Key ba Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each
238. for your WDS connection in this field Otherwise select No Security EncrypKey The Encryp Key is used to encrypt data Peers must use the same key for data transmission Apply Click Apply to save your changes to NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide IPv6 16 1 Overview IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses e See Appendix G on page 309 for more information on IPv6 16 1 1 What You Need to Know IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a25b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 e Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network ad
239. forms whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Ea NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on
240. g Back Click this to return to the previous screen Next Click this to continue 4 3 4 Connection Type PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP The NBG4615 supports one PPTP server connection at any given time Figure 12 Internet Connection Type PPTP 1 Internet Connection Type PPTP gt ided by your Internet Service Pro PPTP Address 327111 PPTP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 PPTP Gateway IP Address 72 1 1 254 PPTP Server IP Address 72 1 1 254 User Name pptp user Password NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen Table9 Internet Connection Type PPTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Select PPTP from the drop down list box To configure a PPTP client you must Connection Type configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection Dynamic IP Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Static IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the NBG4615 a fixed unique IP address PPTP Add
241. ge 219 for information on updating your device s firmware To install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 1 Insert the disc that came with your NBG4615 into your computer s disc drive 2 Run the Setup program by double clicking it and then follow the on screen instructions for installing it on your computer NBG4615 User s Guide 25 Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Note The following operating systems are supported Windows XP Vista 7 32 and 64 bit versions and Mac OS X 10 6 3 To open the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility double click its system tray icon 3 2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility This section describes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility main window Figure 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window FA 2yXEL NetUSB Share Center j nmi x System Tools About o Bi Sf 2 Fil a Configure Auto Connect Connect Disconnect Aequest to Network S Printer Connect Scanner E NBG4615 192 168 1 1 uu Se MFP HP Deskjet F2400 series SEET NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility The following table describes the icons in this window Table 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Configure Server Click to open the NBG4615 s built in Web Configurator which you can use to set up the NBG4615 see Chapter 5 on page 43 for details Auto Connect Printer You can
242. gepe e yu OU bates E Pese Qudupbe eU dab Or DeDb abet un Ou BETA Ru Gab b FRTMIaU ODE 140 NEP EcI E E D ETT NU EA 141 Chapter 16 e T A EIN TU IL I IQ EITILOCOE NIU E et errr ere 143 IAE coo MM TRIN EIER TUN T NIE PSOE 143 TR 1 1 What You Ned T0 KNOW sororia p bdo esee redd e EY rou tae EEU E Epi ivepe SEO penc dt aree Pug m ud 143 Teen UP OCOD Googie p ME OH UEM POE m Eds IS den es a sm EO eM 144 1S2 d IPS Connection EIE oeso ci t captoire cto obi pea oett tou ate bve d edge bu pat po adeat tere penps 145 Tee PVE Somme Cine DI PVG 2icuspis costante obe ice SEE Suae Unt ied an EO dispu acc consen Lac pint eccL aine E eoi tod Dd 146 15 23 Pun ALIS Doe AD BE sanasida aaa baa ts Ede taxa spes aai barbie 147 Chapter 17 WAN REIN IT 149 prog a c1 Nou PC RC LHP RE 149 17 2 What Yor Can Do Rr TU 149 17 9 What You Need To WOW amp uiiiesecondsction isxegi eoe oU did edid dii E DNdd s Re VIR ERH DR CU D PdBEeBE 149 1733 Configuring Your ntemet Coen lO uices ieececosna Ies ts bor hen URBES tete ea rak reo tae i 150 1 2 N oiu qooesaisn thus T SD Sea ILU okie Su elu DL DReM 151 TIU Interna antep eeoccos nado ion estoit a ledio doo io an EON ERSEE n ORUM antEt 151 TATENA Enap M 151 UE cgdg cd d a btc EE 153 1143 PPT Emapa O Gm 155 1245 LSTP Encapsulgtibhl ia 157 TES Bgwahcedg WAN SODO sccotocs beber tor Ple Daisetalev ton iii aene tin IE testem Rid dsgueb 159 176 GMP Shooping dete i i e
243. h you want to connect your local network Go to Section 11 5 on page 84 to view the Status screen in this mode WISP UR In this mode the NBG4615 has the same function as in WISP mode In addition it can provide WiFi function to the clients on the LAN side Go to Section 13 4 on page 101 to view NBG4615 User s Guide the Status screen in this mode Chapter 7 NBG4615 Modes For more information on these modes and to change the mode of your NBG4615 refer to Chapter 29 on page 224 The menu for changing device modes is available in Expert mode only Note Choose your Device Mode carefully to avoid having to change it later When changing to another mode the IP address of the NBG4615 changes The running applications and services of the network devices connected to the NBG4615 can be interrupted In WI SP and WI SP UR mode you should know the SSID and wireless security details of the access point to which you want to connect NBG4615 User s Guide Easy Mode 8 1 Overview The Web Configurator is set to Easy Mode by default You can configure several key features of the NBG4615 in this mode This mode is useful to users who are not fully familiar with some features that are usually intended for network administrators When you log in to the Web Configurator the following screen opens Figure 30 Easy Mode Network Map dim NBG4615 Game Powe Content A Wireless Engine Savint x Filter i MGMT A Security
244. hapter 30 on page 227 to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 5 2 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your NBG4615 hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG4615 refer to the Quick Start Guide Launch your web browser Type http 192 168 1 1 as the website address Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address 5 2 1 Login Screen Note If this is the first time you are accessing the Web Configurator you may be redirected to the Wizard Refer to Chapter 4 on page 33 for the Connection Wizard screens NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator The Web Configurator initially displays the following login screen Figure 19 Login screen NBG4615 tion interface Enter the max 30 alphanumeric p Language rich The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Login screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Type 1234 default as the password Language Select the language you want to use to configure the Web Configurator Click Login This shows the current weather either in celsius or fahrenheit of the city you specify in Section 5 2 3 1 on page 46 This shows the time hh mm ss and date yyyy mm dd of the timezone you 15 03 09 select in Section 5 2 3 2 on page 46 or Section 29 5 on page 217 The time is in 24 hour forma
245. he LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP e Go to Network gt Wireless LAN gt General gt WDS and check if the NBG4615 is set to bridge mode Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again Go to Maintenance Sys OP Mode General Check your System Operation Mode setting e Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet e Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network If the problem continues contact your ISP I cannot access the Internet anymore I had access to the Internet with the NBG4615 but my Internet connection is not available anymore Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 22 Reboot the NBG4615 If the problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 5 on page 22 If t
246. he NBG4615 is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving the NBG4615 closer to the AP if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 3 Reboot the NBG4615 4 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestion e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it 30 5 Resetting the NBG4615 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG4615 you lose all of the changes you have made The NBG4615 re loads its default settings and the password resets to 1234 You have to make all of your changes again You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button To reset the NBG4615 1 Make sure the power LED is on 2 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart reboot the NBG4615 3 Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4615 back to its factory default configurations If the NBG4615 restarts automatically wait for the NBG4615 to finish restarting and log in to the Web Configurator The password is 1234 If the NBG4615 does not restar
247. he RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 183 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 184 WPA 2 PSK Authentication
248. he first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the file path is news pressroom php Since the NBG4615 checks the URL s domain name or IP address and file path separately it will not find items that go across the two For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the NBG4615 would find tw in the domain name www zyxel com tw It would also find news in the file path news pressroom php but it would not find tw news NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 25 Content Filtering 25 2 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict web features add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer Click Security Content Filter to open the Content Filter screen Figure 122 Security gt Content Filter Trusted IP Setup Restrict Web Features Activex Keyword Blocking Keyword Keyword List Delete A trusted computer has full access to all blocked resources 0 0 0 0 means there is no trusted computer Trusted Computer IP Address Enable URL Keyword Blocking Clear All Apply Cancel Content Filter 0 0 0 0 Java Cookies O Web Proxy The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Security gt Content Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted IP Setup To enable this feature type an IP address of any one of the computers in your network that you want to have as a trusted
249. he seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following example MAC 00 13 49 Ho 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 o 34 56 Identity Association An Identity Association IA is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and IA TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA NA were obtained a Renew message If NBG4615 User s Guide sit Appendix G IPv6 the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond the client sends a Rebind message to any available server S2 For an IA TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client s discretion T2 T1 M l l 6
250. heck if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 155 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings 1 Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 156 Internet Options Privacy Internet Option
251. hem or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet e Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s e If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment s
252. hernet LAN ports WLAN as WAN LAN DHCP server is configurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 1 WAN IP is configurable Click OK The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to WISP mode is successful 12 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator in WISP Mode To login to Web Configurator in WI SP Mode do the following 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode 2 The default IP address of the NBG4615 is 192 168 1 1 If you did not change this you can use the same IP address in WI SP Mode Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192 168 1 1 as the web address in your web browser If you changed the IP address of your NBG4615 while in Router mode use this IP address in WI SP Mode The WI SP Mode IP address is always the same as the Router mode IP address Note After clicking Login the Easy Mode appears Refer to Section on page 57 for the Easy Mode screens Click Expert mode to see the screens described in the sections following this 12 4 WISP Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen Figure 63 Status WISP Mode VAY 1 NBG4615 EJ Status Device Information Item Data Host Name NBG4615 Firmware Version V1 00 BWQ 0 B8 Sys OP Mode WISP Mode WAN Information MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD A amp 0C IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client LAN Information MAC Address 00 E0
253. hould be treated separately NBG4615 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Jg lg o Jm 19 MOOO ee cR T E cer rt rer ererrererr er freee 21 THERES BUNOT auae o rada e de RR ER UI aan n AR a OR Ra C RN ied 24 Z XEL N amp W Share C nter UWI usicsuoc caius cout EURO o Fudge Fa o Rusa Uk E Kd tado acabe Ec ad uad 25 Conna TOU WHINE aic eis oS REP ECE ON ReDSEN USER EN ROBUR ECKE E RAT RETE ER MM EAD 33 Hagoducing me Web DODIGUESEBE aaa poc x tena Qn ann Said opa atra asc P OL dor dct S 43 pugnae m TT 49 Ha Ay NOT Wt M Nc 55 CH RI T E bf Ig aco dT TERT TU Em 68 i5 Pomi rs C M 75 PUSS all Roper NOGO etc 82 MANS e E T E A A E E E A E E A E E econ aes 90 MSF e LIP MOIE gd uod ad A di a qa PO AEAN ER a OL ANEN 99 EIS NS OE EEUU 105 Eoo 8 123 jid temm T 125 lx NI C T d 143 HEB n onda oes ern ode DURS renee mre rent d AUD EP wre bt EDS ORI oU asbl CIL R o DOR Ef torre nes 149 LAN EE I E ULT TUE 163 Rite 167 DUET od ace Geta inn oan a Hob Ema E ea Pace anny de Poa nd tcd E cea DD UN Crt er rand de sia a 171 Ber c M 181 Words eT 183 anat TEES 185 PWS WGI Mm 187 Bs D RTT EE M E A 192
254. hows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard WPS This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up Click the status to display Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen System Status 70 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 29 Status Screen Router Mode continued System Up Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Item This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording Data This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG4615 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4615 s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the NBG4615 is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using System Setting
255. hysical connection determines whether the NBG4615 ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 103 LAN and WAN IP Addresses mn The LAN parameters of the NBG4615 are preset in the factory with the following values e IP address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits e DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured 18 3 1 IP Pool Setup The NBG4615 is pre configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses excluding the NBG4615 itself in the lower range 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 1 32 for other server computers for instance servers for mail FTP TFTP web etc that you may have 18 3 2 LAN TCP IP The NBG4615 has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability 18 3 3 IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The NBG4615 supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the NBG46
256. i 164 1e80 5267 f0ff fe11 d750 64 Setup Stateful v fo minutes Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 56 Network IPv6 Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 Connection Type Setup IPv6 Connection Type Select Ethernet as the IPv6 connection type if your ISP provides you a static IPv6 address You need to enter the IPv6 information below according to what your ISP provided WAN IPv6 Address Set up IPv6 Address Subnet Prefix Length Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP Gateway IP Address Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon hexadecimal notation First DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server s IP address in this field Second DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server s IP address in this field LAN IPv6 Address Setup LAN IPv6 address Enter a valid IPv6 address for the LAN using colon hexadecimal notation LAN IPv6 Link local Address This shows the IPv6 link local address that the NBG4615 generates automatically NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 16 IPv6 Table 56 Network gt IPv6 Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Address Autoconfiguration Setup Enable Address Autoconfiguration Select the checkbox to enable Address
257. ically when it is no longer in use 28 2 What You Need to Know UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 28 2 1 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following e Dynamic port mapping e Learning public IP addresses e Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT 28 2 2 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the NBG4615 allows multicast messages on the LAN only NBG4615 User s Guide 207 Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP All UPnP ena
258. ices Selec ie senvices runner on pour ralak that Intemel user car A A mime 192 166 Iv mens 192 168 1 97 7810 7 Figure 134 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 158 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service 143 een Note When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Figure 135 System Tray Icon Internet Connection is now connected Click here for more information NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 28 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 136 Internet Connection Status Y Internet Connection Status m General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer 33 8 Received 5 943 Properties Disable 28 4 2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the NBG4615 without finding out the IP address of the NBG4615 first This comes helpful if
259. iew In universal repeater mode your NBG4615 can act as an access point and wireless client at the same time The NBG4615 can connect to an existing network through another access point and also lets wireless clients connect to the network through it This helps you expand wireless coverage when you have an access point or wireless router already in your network In the example below the NBG4615 A is configured as a universal repeater It has three clients that want to connect to the Internet The NBG4615 wirelessly connects to the available access point B Figure 52 Universal Repeater Mode After the NBG4615 and the access point connect the NBG4615 acquires its IP address from the access point The clients of the NBG4615 can now surf the Internet 11 2 What You Can Do e Use the Status screen to view read only information about your NBG4615 Section 11 5 on page 84 e Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point Section 10 5 on page 80 Use the Universal Repeater screen to configure the security between the NBG4615 and another access point Section 11 6 on page 86 e Use other Wireless LAN screens to configure the wireless settings and wireless security between the wireless clients and the NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode 11 3 What You Need to Know With the exception of the Wireless LAN gt AP Client screen other configuration screens
260. if they are connected directly to your computer This allows you to easily share USB based devices such as printers scanners portable hard disks MP3 players faxes and digital cameras to name a few with all the other people in your home or office as long as they are connected to the NBG4615 and have the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility installed Note Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility for NetUSB functionality from the included disc or download the latest version from the zyxel com website 3 1 1 Quick Setup This section shows you how to get started using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 1 Install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on each computer connected to the NBG4615 2 Connect a USB device to the USB port on the NBG4615 Note If you are connecting multiple devices to the NBG4615 first connect a USB hub to the NBG4615 then connect your other USB devices to it 3 Runthe ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility to display a list of all connected USB devices then use it to connect your computer to them 3 1 2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Before you can access USB devices connected to the NBG4615 you must first install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on any computer on your LAN to which you want to allow access to these devices Note In order to properly use the utility with your NBG4615 ensure that the NBG4615 firmware is version v1 00 BWQ 0 or higher See Chapter 29 on pa
261. ifier which are derived from embedded IEEE Identifiers See page 143 for more information Router Advertisement Specify the lifetime of the router advertisement Lifetime ES ae Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 16 2 3 IPv6 Connection Link local only Use the Link local only connection mode for the NBG4615 to communicate with other IPv6 devices on the LAN side If you choose this mode the LAN I Pv6 Link local Address will be shown in the screen NBG4615 User s Guide 147 Chapter 16 IPv6 If you select Link local only as the IPv6 Connection Type the following screen displays Figure 93 Network gt IPv6 Link local only IPv6 IPv6 Connection Type Setup IPv6 Connection Type LAN IPv6 Address Setup LAN IPv6 Link local Address link local only 7 fe80 5267 f0ff fe11 d4750 64 Ano _Cancei NBG4615 User s Guide WAN 17 1 Overview This chapter discusses the NBG4615 s WAN screens Use these screens to configure your NBG4615 for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private net
262. ifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the NBG4615 has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the NBG4615 knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the NBG4615 is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node Router 1 via gateway Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the NBG4615 about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 116 Example of Static Routing Topology N1 N2 N3 b NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 22 Static Route 22 2 IP Static Route Screen Click Network gt Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen Figure 117 Network gt Static Route IP Static Route Static Routing Settings Route Name C Destination IP Address A IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address 1 Metric Interface LAN v Add Rule Application Rules Summary No Active Name Destination Gateway Metric Interface Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Network gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Routing Settings Route Name Enter a the name that describes or identifies this route Destination IP Enter the IP network address of the final destination Address IP Subnet This is the subnet to which the route s final destination belongs Netmask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gatewa
263. ing section of the User s Guide PDF Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG4615 up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents NBG4615 User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The NBG4615 may be referred to as the NBG4615 the device the product or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to
264. ion FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation NBG4615 User s Guide 351 Appendix Legal Information If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Radiation Exposure Statement e
265. ireless Router 115 14 6 Connecting to USB Storage with the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 119 14 6 1 Multiple Connections to the USB Device eeeessssssesees esent etna 119 14 7 Automatically Connecting toa USB Printet suas cneesa aea knees daa eaa to dcr aaaea 121 Part lls Technical HeferencB eie se oo sia eu prit b bit ese 123 Chapter 15 O O A OAO 125 NES j Mem 125 TOU ebat VOULU ERO asoecaxeagisun bap aaa Er pb npa manish pL a pcr P eaa aa 125 12 NBG4615 User s Guide Table of Contents 15 L2 What You Should KNW cuo usas iE ra EEG per aa agenti asa er pee E rebel 126 15 2 General Wireless LAN DGFBOEN usus cce miumstec ue deri ba tesa aiii esr ER dandas Raab YER DUE E Raw d dk Ra 128 cm VU iri Ne a 129 1S0 nc oc e ETS DNE EI m S pene sei eee agreed 132 D oec c er EE o F En Emm 132 prr iuc rri 132 15 3 3 AWPA PSROWPAB POR onoriano ouie tied ak a OE dag dida kau aac denn b a ordi d 134 154 MIB FIBI ssec dioe pend MEM reU Id MN UN demie d Mid aM 135 15 5 Wireless LAN Advanced OBIIT uisi i i E EE ere lem ep i p D ep Gu I GER ERA 136 15 6 Dos or Semice Q05 Seg uiisassse unica iiic uq a ck vaa uda Eom EORR a UR Eo E Rr EQ 137 Te Ns i PENTIUM ERRARE 137 La WES RUOTE oe I done ora OPE VPE MEDLEY ROLE C E E a trix na pra la Ru 139 35 9 Soptedulido SIBI Grec tdte
266. ireless Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL Security mode WPA2 PSK v Wireless password eee aT Verify Password The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Wireless Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless Network LAN Name SSID eae If you change this field on the NBG4615 make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Security mode Select a Security level from the drop down list box Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security to configure a Pre Shared Key Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK respectively Wireless Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters You can set up the most secure password wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Table 12 Wireless Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Verify Retype the password to confirm Password Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving Back Click this to return to the previous screen Next Click this to continue Congratulations Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer to visit your favorite website Note If you cannot access the Internet when your computer
267. is connected to one of the NBG4615 s LAN ports check your connections Then turn the NBG4615 off wait for a few seconds then turn it back on If that does not work log in to the web configurator again and check you have typed all information correctly See the User s Guide for more suggestions Figure 18 Congratulations You are connected to the Internet And not tr in easy router management tool ever You can also click GO to open the Easy Mode Web Configurator of your NBG4615 You have successfully set up your NBG4615 to operate on your network and access the Internet You are now ready to connect wirelessly to your NBG4615 and access the Internet NBG4615 User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 5 1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NBG4615 Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens The Web Configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG4615 via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter C
268. is screen by clicking Home CE or DEJ in the Easy Mode or Expert mode screens The Home screen displays as follows Figure 21 Home Screen NBG4615 come n interface Please EE E English The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Home Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Go Click this to open the Easy Mode Web Configurator Language Select a language to go to the Easy mode Web Configurator in that language and click Login NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 15 Home Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This is just an example This shows the current weather either in celsius or fahrenheit of the city you specify in Section 5 2 3 1 on page 46 This is just an example This shows the time hh mm ss and date yyyy mm dd of the timezone you select in Section 5 2 3 2 on page 46 or Section 29 5 on page 217 5 2 3 1 Weather Edit You can change the temperature unit and select the location for which you want to know the weather Click the icon to change the Weather display Figure 22 Change Weather zl Change location UK Greenwich USA New York The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Change Weather LABEL DESCRIPTION C or F Choose which temperature unit you want the NBG4615 to display Change Location Select the location for which you want to know the
269. is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 182 RTS CTS RTS Range Wireless AP a Station y RTS s 7 CTS Range When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same
270. ith the connection cables 5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG4615 with the screws on the wall Hang the NBG4615 on the screws Figure 152 Wall mounting Example Li j TA e NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 153 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 4 22 0 1 2 01 2 16 30 0 2 0 30 0 2 0 NW M K cal NBG4615 User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6 7 and 8 Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 InInternet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 154 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also c
271. its factory defaults and try to access the NBG4615 with the default IP address See Section 5 3 1 on page 47 6 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Try to access the NBG4615 using another service such as Telnet If you can access the NBG4615 check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG4615 does not respond to HTTP e If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a LAN ETHERNET port I can see the Login screen but I cannot log in to the NBG4615 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly The default password is 1234 This field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the Web Configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG4615 Log out of the NBG4615 in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session Try logging in again after 5 minutes 4 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4615 5 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 30 5 on page 231 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 30 4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet Check the hardware connections and make sure t
272. l to info goahead com BY CLICKING ON THE Register BUTTON ON THE REGISTRATION FORM YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO ACCEPT THIS LICENSE OR YOU DO NOT QUALIFY FOR A LICENSE BASED ON THE TERMS SET FORTH ABOVE YOU MUST NOT CLICK THE Register BUTTON 332 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Exhibit A GoAhead Trademarks Logos and Product Designation Information 01 28 00 This Product includes LLTD software under below license LICENSE NOTICE Use of the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit is covered under the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit License Agreement which is provided within the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit or at http www microsoft com whdc rally rallykit mspx If you want a license from Microsoft to use the software in the Microsoft Windows Rally Development Kit you must 1 complete the designated licensee information in the Windows Rally Development Kit License Agreement and 2 sign and return the Agreement AS IS to Microsoft at the address provided in the Agreement This Product includes ntpclient software under below license ntpclient is Copyright 1997 1999 2000 2003 2006 2007 Larry Doolittle and may be freely copied and modified according to the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 If you want to distribute ntpclient under other terms contact me I
273. le Click Apply Scheduling Universal Repeater General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Universal Repeater Parameters M Enable SSD SSIDofMyAP MAC Address Optional Loo Security Mode wea esk Encryption Type ee v Pre Shared Key KeyofitywWirelessNetwork Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 14 Tutorials 11 Set the channel number in the Wireless LAN gt General screen to be the same as the one on the wireless router or AP to which the NBG4615 is connecting This allows wireless clients access or acquire an IP address from another AP or wireless router through the NBG4615 in universal repeater mode General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling Universal Repeater 1 L L 1 ERES M iddstatatas Wireless Setup Wireless LAN ON Network Name SSID Zyxel T Hide lM Enable Intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID1 1 n Hide O Enable Intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID2 Fidel Enable ntra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID3 T Hide Enable intra BSS Traffic Channel Selection Channel 05 2432MHz Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 05 2432MHz IV Communication between wireless clients with different SSIDs Apply Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide 117 Chapter 14 Tutorials 12 Go to the Status screen If the NBG4615 has successfully connected to an AP or wireless router it displays the SSID and MAC address o
274. lications Computer History Leave User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Run as root KDE su A C Please enter the Administrator root Ta password to continue Command sbin yast2 Password Ignore X Cancel 286 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon YaST Control Center linux h20z File Edit Help D Software e Network Card Network Devices C fal Network Services 49 Novell AppArmor Qu Security and Users Miscellaneous 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button vasr26Glinux h20z Network Card a Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration Name IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name
275. lient Description Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 This is DHCPv6 client version 0 7 2 Path to executable C Program Files DHCPv6Client_dibbler dibbler client exe service d C NPr Startup type Automatic x Service status Stopped Ca You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters Lok DL cancel 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection 2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix G IPv6 Networking Connect using amp Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items OM Client for Microsoft Networks ao 4 Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Install Uninstal Properties Description TCP IP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks pm 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen 5 Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 6 Use the ipco
276. lity and performance of the Original Code NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements including any Modifications You make and the Documentation is with You Should the Original Code or the Documentation prove defective You and not GoAhead or its distributors licensors or dealers assume the entire cost of all necessary servicing or repair GoAhead does not warrant that the functions contained in the Original Code will meet your requirements or operate in the combination that You may select for use that the operation of the Original Code will be uninterrupted or error free or that defects in the Original Code will be corrected No oral or written statement by GoAhead or by a representative of GoAhead shall create a warranty or increase the scope of this warranty GOAHEAD DOES NOT WARRANT THE ORIGINAL CODE AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OR THE LIKE WITH RESPECT TO ANY COPYRIGHT PATENT TRADE SECRET TRADEMARK OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT OF ANY THIRD PARTY AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE ORIGINAL CODE DOES NOT INCLUDE ANY VIRUS SOFTWARE ROUTINE OR OTHER SOFTWARE DESIGNED TO PERMIT UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO DISABLE ERASE OR OTHERWISE HARM SOFTWARE HARDWARE OR DATA OR TO PERFORM ANY OTHER SUCH ACTIONS Any warranties that by law survive the foregoing disclaimers shall terminate ninety 90 days from the date You received the Original Code 6 Limitation of Liability YOUR SOLE REMEDIES AND GOAHEAD S ENTIRE LIABILITY
277. lt C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address C Set WAN MAC Address Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection L2TP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type To configure a L2TP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a layer 2 connection and the L2TP parameters for an L2TP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly L2TP Configuration Server IP Address Type the IP address of the L2TP server Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is from ISP the default selection Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN Table 61 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection L2TP Encapsulation continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address IP Subnet Mask Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 Gatew
278. ly marked as such 2 4 Restrictions on Use You may sublicense Modifications to third parties such as subcontractors or OEM s provided that You enter into license agreements with such third parties that bind such third parties to all the obligations under this Agreement applicable to you and that are otherwise substantially similar in scope and application to this Agreement 3 Term This Agreement and license are effective from the time You accept the terms of this Agreement until this Agreement is terminated You may terminate this Agreement at any time by uninstalling or destroying all copies of the Original Code including any and all binary versions and removing any Modifications to the Original Code existing in any products This Agreement will terminate immediately and without further notice if You fail to comply with any provision of this Agreement All restrictions on use and all other provisions that may reasonably be interpreted to survive termination of this Agreement will survive termination of this Agreement for any reason Upon termination You agree to uninstall or destroy all copies of the Original Code Modifications and Documentation 4 Trademarks and Brand 4 1 License and Use NBG4615 User s Guide 327 Appendix H Open Software Announcements GoAhead hereby grants to You a limited world wide royalty free non exclusive license to use the GoAhead trade names trademarks logos service marks and product designa
279. ly when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker fro
280. m capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WP
281. mal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 12 5 2 WPA 2 PSK Use this screen if the access point to which you want to connect uses WPA 2 PSK security mode Figure 68 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WISP General Site Survey WISP Parameters SSD L o Channel Selection Channero1 2412MHz v Security Mode weAz esk v Encryption Type Cap aes Pre Shared Key Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WISP LABEL DESCRIPTION WISP Parameters SSID Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting Channel Selection The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless devices is called a channel The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to enable data encryption Encryption Type Select the type of wireless encryption employed by the access point to which you want to connect Pre Shared Key WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password for authentication Type the pre shared key employed by the access point to which you want to connect Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Ca
282. matching the conditions of the firewall rule are stopped Delete Click Delete to remove the firewall rule Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again See Appendix F on page 305 for commonly used services and port numbers NBG4615 User s Guide Content Filtering 25 1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords 25 1 1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Content Filtering Profiles Content filtering allows you to block certain web features such as cookies and or block access to specific web sites For example you can configure one policy that blocks John Doe s access to arts and entertainment web pages A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG4615 checks the URL s domain name or IP address and file path separately when performing keyword blocking The URL s domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the domain name is www zyxel com tw The file path is the characters that come after t
283. mple TCP port 80 defines web traffic See Appendix F on page 305 for some common services and port numbers Protocol This is the protocol TCP UDP or user defined used for the service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management 26 5 2 Rule Configuration User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications or services click the Edit icon in the User defined Service table of the Advanced screen The following screen displays Figure 127 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration User defined Service General Advanced Monitor Rule Configuration BW Budget Minimum Bandwidth x io kbps Destination Address Start is2168120 Destination Address End fisz 168 1 30 Destination Port b Source Address Start ooo Source Address End ooo Source Port bo Protocol TCP 7 Apply cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration User defined Service LABEL DESCRIPTION BW Budget Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second Destination Address Enter the starting IP address of the destination computer Start The NBG4615
284. n Table 29 Status Screen Router Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created Sys OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 is set Router Mode WAN Information MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port s IP address This shows the WAN port s subnet mask Default Gateway DHCP This shows the WAN port s gateway IP address This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device WLAN Information IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Server or Disable WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 s wireless LAN is set Access Point Mode MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN ON or OFF Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN Channel This s
285. n address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your NBG4615 filters out NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 20 NAT all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The NBG4615 keeps track of the original addresses a
286. n off the NBG4615 while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a configuration upload successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG4615 again The NBG4615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect If you see an error screen click Back to return to the Backup Restore screen Reset Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the NBG4615 to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG4615 Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button Note If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG4615 IP address 192 168 1 2 See Appendix D on page 263 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address 29 8 Reset Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG4615 without turning the power off Click Maintenance Reset Restart to open the following screen Figure 146 Maintenance Reset Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Rest
287. nagement 27 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens Remote Management allows you to manage your NBG4615 from a remote location through the following interfaces e LAN and WAN e LAN only e WAN only Note The NBG4615 is managed using the Web Configurator 27 2 What You Need to Know Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when 1 The IP address in the Secured Client I P Address field Section 27 3 on page 206 does not match the client IP address If it does not match the NBG4615 will disconnect the session immediately 2 There is already another remote management session You may only have one remote management session running at one time 3 There is a firewall rule that blocks it 27 2 1 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled e Use the NBG4615 s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the NBG4615 s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 27 2 2 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The NBG4615 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling You can change the timeout period in the System screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 27 Remote Management 27 3 WWW Screen To change your NBG4615 s remote management settings click Management Remote M
288. ncel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide 97 Chapter 12 WISP Mode 12 5 3 Site Survey Screen Use this screen to scan for and connect to a wireless network automatically Go to Configuration gt Site Survey to open the following screen Figure 69 Configuration gt Wireless LAN gt Site Survey WISP Station Site Survey Station Site Survey SSID BSSID Signal Strength Channel station encryp station auth Network Type c Bl zweit Benny 02 13 49 11 66 8C 3496 1 TKIPAES WPATPSKWPA2PSK In zy penpen 42 44 03 D9 F9 7C 76 1 Not Use NONE In ZyXEL_668C 02 13 49 78 16 AF 5 1 TKIPAES WPA1PSKWPA2PSK In c ZyXEL123456 00 13 47 12 34 56 596 1 Not Use NONE In 3205_Evo2 00 23 F8 28 AD C9 0 11 WEP Unknown In e Zy private H99HYK 40 44 04 12 0 amp 5C 5596 11 AES WPA2PSK In TELUSO02 02 10 18 01 00 02 5 11 TKIPAES WPATPSKWPA2PSK In The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Configuration gt Wireless LAN gt Site Survey WISP LABEL DESCRIPTION Station Site Survey Select a wireless device and click Add Profile to open a configuration screen where you can add the selected wireless device to a profile and then enable it SSID This displays the SSID of the wireless device v indicates the wireless device is added to an activated profile and the NBG4615 is connecting to it BSSID This displays the MAC add
289. nctions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with NBG4615 User s Guide 345 Appendix H Open Software Announcements modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You ma
290. nd port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 109 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN 192 168 1 10 WAN 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA3 192 168 1 13 IGA4 192 168 1 10 Inside Local Address ILA Inside Global Address IGA 192 168 1 14 EL 192 168 1 10 E 20 2 General Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server Click Network gt NAT to open the General screen Figure 110 Network gt NAT gt General General Application Advanced NAT Setup V Enable Network Address Translation Default Server Setup Server IP Address o 0 0 0 Apply Cancel NBG4615 User s Guide 173 Chapter 20 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Network NAT General LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Setup Enable Network Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol Address address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a Translation local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Select the check box to enable NAT Default Server Setup Server IP In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A Address default server receives packets from ports
291. nfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address This example shows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPv6 Address 2 20012 b021 2d 1000 Link local IPv6 Address fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 IPv4 Address e e s w 172 16 100 61 Subnet Mask s 4 eoe oce 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway e80 213 49f feaa 7125 11 172 16 100 254 NBG4615 User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for NBG4615 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED HOWEVER CERTAIN ZYXEL S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN IN PART SOME THIRD PARTY S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY RUN DISTRIBUTE MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY
292. ng disclaimer NBG4615 User s Guide 337 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY
293. nge for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 29 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 97 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Tite aaa IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 NBG4615 User s Guide 257 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Example Table 97 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 98 Subnet 2 LAST OCTET BIT Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Broadcast Address 192 168 1
294. ngs Click WAN from the Configuration menu The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose 17 4 1 Ethernet Encapsulation NBG4615 User s Guide 151 Chapter 17 WAN This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation Figure 96 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation i Encapsulation Bigpond Server User Name Password Retype to Confirm IP Address IP Subnet Mask WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address e Factory default Internet Connection Advanced IGMP Snooping ISP Parameters for Internet Access WAN IP Address Assignment ia Get automatically from ISP Default C Use Fixed IP Address Gateway IP Address C Clone the computers MAC address IP Address C Set WAN MAC Address Ethernet bud C Enable Disable New South Wales 61 9 192 13 m m m From ISP From ISP m m Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Default Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the defa
295. nnection Type Link local only LAN IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 5267 f0ff fe11 d750 64 Summary BW MGMT Monitor Details DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen Table 28 Status Screen Icon Key Router Mode ICON DESCRIPTION Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator Click this to go to the Home page See Chapter 6 on page 49 Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information Click this icon to go to Easy Mode See Chapter 8 on page 57 Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen statistics Cj Refresh Interval None x automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics Refresh Now Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 9 Router Mode Table 28 Status Screen Icon Key Router Mode continued ICON DESCRIPTION Click this icon to see the Status page The information in this screen depends on the device mode you select Click this icon to see the Monitor navigation menu Click this icon to see the Configuration navigation menu di Click this icon to see the Maintenance navigation menu The following table describes the labels shown in the Status scree
296. not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers e If the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 108 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files TCP 21 that may n
297. notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 94 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD Cus IDECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 95 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MARI MEEBO 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 22 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous numbe
298. nse to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright NBG4615 User s Guide 317 Appendix H Open Software Announcements The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law trade secret law international treaty provisions and the applicable national laws of each respective country All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation 4 Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance technical or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from th
299. o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Hungarian Alul rott ZyXEL nyilatkozom hogy a berendez s megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EK ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Polish Niniejszym ZyXEL o wiadcza ze sprz t jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portuguese ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 EC Slovenian ZyXEL izjavlja da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 EC Slovak ZyXEL t mto vyhlasuje e zariadenia sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 EC Finnish ZyXEL vakuuttaa t ten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Swedish H rmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning st r I verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EC Bulgarian C Hacrosuijoro ZyXEL aeKknapnpa ue TOBa O60pyABaHe e B CbOTBeTCTBMe CbC CblljecTBeHuTe uW3uckBaHuMs n Apyrure npnnoxnmn pasnopez6ure Ha Anupektusa 1999 5 EC Icelandic H r me l sir ZyXEL v yfir a essi b na ur er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og nnur vi eigandi kv i tilskipunar
300. o aa nosni YS ue aos E Sox uas ESO cendo sce Das oc uad 177 20 93 Moger Fort Forwarding e n era ESEA 178 20 5 4 Trigger Port Forwarding Exaile ci ect i peu pru papi qn aad RR Y pt EFE a aia aar d pi RR 178 20 5 5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Poris ies tidstei eerte vica in cera Eod tie UD UE RS 179 Chapter 21 DDNS iia ice di b der EDD MM M MM M E EE 181 AT OONO dodsxdinssiimdiiierteuleneda tet det cnra ode Li aarasg anao ta aa Eb erudire t E cS 181 EXECUTIVE emt EANA 181 PRN eI TN 182 Chapter 22 Slade BOUE qos ied ee o CHER ERE Gd ERR EGRE DEA CER ELO DAL cis en OH RO ER ee 183 BD DOT ON me emer ere Cte eer Med dicc Odd tud Ves LUDUM ed VEU ND LIUM cM Da E teen aR RT rT 183 22 A IP Stan Haute SCOE uuecedtusiuiesdiedeae UP M Mie o a dede e lessee um bud ue eee 184 Chapter 23 PHP d RD E PUR ned a A A E O CERE PUR BRCDE DG RET EEUU D Een DU Aden 185 NBG4615 User s Guide Table of Contents BOLSOS DU ss ERN DERNIER REOR PP HC NIRE E 185 Ex eel rae MO E 185 Chapter 24 FilbiWall aui p DRE E PAR FREE CEDAR EPL QE zeit EP TEES AURI EUER EET EM SETA EUER EP RE EAR ER DE ARR ET RP ERO MR 187 EDEN II AERE 187 228511 What TOU Cal DO uices pude tasa bar codd e Casi pra pui cna ddr dna ead adc Da repa D tad 187 2412 What rou Necad To KNOW 2ocooinceidiiedstmeo iin DER EMT Id eb he DrEd D rud rp T dddteme De nIMIUM 187 o mostre reci MR RE TERT T 189 GIRONE ETE a a a T 189 Chapter 25 Content uic dll RITE 192 CN ESI MER TT 192 2
301. o disable this feature This may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices Auto Subnet Configuration None Select this option to have the NBG4615 do nothing when it gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192 168 x y where x and y are from zero to nine or in the same subnet as the LAN IP address Enable Auto bridge Select this option to have the NBG4615 switch to bridge mode automatically mode when the NBG4615 gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192 168 x y where x and y are from zero to nine no matter what the LAN IP address is Enable Auto IP Select this option to have the NBG4615 change its LAN IP address to Change mode 10 0 0 1 or 192 168 1 1 accordingly when the NBG4615 gets a dynamic WAN IP address in the same subnet as the LAN IP address 192 168 1 1 or 10 0 0 1 The NAT DHCP server and firewall functions on the NBG4615 are still available in this mode Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 IGMP Snooping Screen Use this screen to enable IGMP snooping if you have LAN users that subscribe to multicast services NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Click Network gt WAN gt IGMP Snooping The screen appears as
302. oAhead means Go Ahead Software Inc 1 3 Intellectual Property Rights means all rights whether now existing or hereinafter acquired in and to trade secrets patents copyrights trademarks know how as well as moral rights and similar rights of any type under the laws of any governmental authority domestic or foreign including rights in and to all applications and registrations relating to any of the foregoing 1 4 License or Agreement means this document 1 5 Modifications means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications 1 6 Original Code means the Source Code to GoAhead proprietary computer software entitled GoAhead WebServer 1 7 Response Header means the first portion of the response message output by the GoAhead WebServer containing but not limited to header fields for date content type server identification and cache control 1 8 Server Identification Field means the field in the Response Header which contains the text Server GoAhead Webs 1 9 You means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under and complying with all of the terms of this license or a future version of this license For legal entities You includes any entity which controls is controlled by or is under common control with You For purposes of this definition control means a the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of
303. ollowing table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The NBG4615 performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again 24 3 Services If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG4615 an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the NBG4615 exists Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG4615 when unsupported ports are probed You can also use this screen to enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them NBG4615 User s Guide 189 Chapter 24 Firewall Click Security gt Firewall gt Services The screen appears as shown next Figure 121 Security gt Firewall gt Services General Services ICMP Respond to Ping on WAN x Apply Enable Firewall Rule V Enable Firewall Rule Aey Add Firewall Rule Service Name 4 Dest IP Address Wd Source IP Address d 1 Protocol None Dest Port Range I F LC Source Port Range LE 1 Firewall Rule Firewall Rule Serice Name DestIP Source IP
304. onnecting to USB Storage with the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility This tutorial shows you how to connect to a USB device over your NBG4615 network by using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 1 Install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on the computer to which you want to connect the USB device See Chapter 3 on page 26 for details on the installation 2 Connect a USB device to one of the USB ports of the NBG4615 3 Open the ZyXEL NetUSB Sharing Center Utility on your computer The name of the USB device automatically shows in the Utility screen 4 Click on the USB device s name Then click Connect Zeros Share Center i 5 xl System Tools About SS NBG4615 182 168 1 1 Cu Mass Storage Sunplus Innovation Technology USB to Se 5 The device mounts on your system amp My Computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back T ej Fa Search E Folders E Address d My Computer System Tasks Y Hard Disk Drives Other Places A Se ZyXEL C Local Disk Alaih Local Disk amp My Network Places Local Disk Lj My Documents Control Panel Devices with Removable Storage 13 314 Floppy A 314 Inch Floppy Disk Details A DVD Drive E CD Drive 14 6 1 Multiple Connections to the USB Device The Utility supports one connection to the NBG4615 s USB device at a time If more than one computer want to connect to the USB device follow the steps below NBG4615 User s Gui
305. ons of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
306. opyrights and licenses must be followed Redistributions of source code must retain the authors copyright notice s this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors copyright notice s this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement with the name s of the authors as specified in the copyright notice s substituted where indicated This product includes software developed by the authors which are mentioned at the start of the source files and other contributors 5 Neither the name s of the author s nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES L
307. or company network N Note The home or company network N and Guest WLAN network are independent networks Note Only Router mode supports guest WLAN AP mode Universal Repeater mode and WISP mode don t support guest WLAN Figure 78 Guest Wireless LAN Network Guest WLAN Bandwidth The Guest WLAN Bandwidth function allows you to specify a priority level and restrict the maximum bandwidth for the guest wireless network Additionally you can also define bandwidth for your NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN home or office network An example is shown next to define maximum bandwidth for your networks A is Guest WLAN and N is home or company network Figure 79 Example Bandwidth for Different Networks ANL 100 kbps Click Network Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 80 Network Wireless LAN General Security MAC Filter WPS Station Scheduling Wireless Setup Wireless LAN OFF Network Name SSID Ext ri Hide Iv Enable Intra BSS Traffic Enable Network Name SSID1 yess Hide IV Enable Intra BSS Traffic T Enable NetworkName ss2 zyxeL ssp2 C Hide M Enable Intra BSS Traffic Enable NetworkName ss3 zyxeL ssp3 C Hide M Enable Intra BSS Traffic Vi Enable Guest WLAN IP Address s2316821 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Enable Bandwidth Management for Guest WLAN Maximum Band width fo kbps Channel Selection IV Auto Chann
308. ord pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 106 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP on
309. ord txt file This Product includes openssl software under below license LICENSE ISSUES NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to NBG4615 User s Guide 335 Appendi
310. ords in the URL Management NBG4615 User s Guide 73 Chapter 9 Router Mode 74 Table 30 Navigation Panel Router Mode continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Bandwidth General Use this screen to enable bandwidth management Management Advanced Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule Monitor Use this screen to view the amount of network bandwidth that applications running in the network are using Remote WWW Use this screen to be able to access the NBG4615 from the LAN Management WAN or both UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG4615 MAI NTENANCE General General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names Password Password Use this screen to change the password of your NBG4615 Setup Time Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG4615 s time and date Firmware Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4615 Upgrade Upgrade Backup Backup Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset Restore Restore the factory defaults to your NBG4615 Reset Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG4615 without turning the Restart power off Sys OP Mode Sys OP Mode This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point NBG4615 User s Guide Access Point Mode 10 1 Overview Use you
311. ories gt Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows Vista 1 2 This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional Click Start Control Panel Be RES Y Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To eval Media Player Classic d Control Panel Default Programs gt AllPrograms o v j WM Nol GOo Control Panel bal neal 2 File Edit View Tools Help Back up your computer Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Control Panel Home z t System and Maintenance User Accounts Classic View e Wi C E i Get started with Windows Change account type Security Ay Check for updates Allow a program through Windows Firewall etwork and Internet A Connect to the Internet Clock Language and Region View network status and tasks L Change keyboards or other input methods Set up file sharing Change display language Click the Network and Sharing Center icon G gt Control Panel Network and Internet p v 41 Search p File Edit View Tool
312. ork via an access point Use this mode if you already have an access point or router in your network In the example below one NBG4615 A is configured as a wireless client and another is used as an access point B The wireless client has two clients that need to connect to the Internet The NBG4615 wirelessly connects to the available access point B Figure 60 Wireless Client Mode Access Point After the NBG4615 and the access point connect the NBG4615 acquires its WAN IP address from the access point The clients of the NBG4615 can now surf the Internet 12 2 What You Can Do e Use the Status screen to view read only information about your NBG4615 Section 11 5 on page 84 e Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point Section 10 5 on page 80 e Use the Wireless LAN screen to associate your NBG4615 acting as a wireless client with an existing access point Section 12 5 on page 95 12 3 What You Need to Know With the exception of the Wireless LAN screen the Monitor Configuration and Maintenance screens in WI SP mode are similar to the ones in Router mode See Chapter 15 on page 125 through Chapter 29 on page 224 of this User s Guide NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 12 WISP Mode 12 3 1 Setting your NBG4615 to WISP Mode 1 Log into the Web Configurator if you haven t already See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this 2 To set your NBG4615 to W
313. ormation to its LAN hosts The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4 ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6 IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP The Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbor s reachability in a network An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types Neighbor solicitation A request from a host to determine a neighbor s link layer address MAC address and detect if the neighbor is still reachable A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message from the host with a neighbor advertisement message E NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix G IPv6 e Neighbor advertisement A response from a node to announce its link layer address e Router solicitation A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets e Router advertisement A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cach
314. ort to connect multiple computers or servers for example game servers in your network to the NBG4615 LEDs Power LAN1 4 WAN Internet WPS USB1 2 Reset button The reset button is built into the rear panel Use this button to restore the NBG4615 to its factory default settings Press for 1 second to restart the device Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings WPS button Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security enabled wireless connection Power switch Turn on or turn off the power of the NBG4615 using this switch WLAN switch Turn on or turn off the wireless function of the NBG4615 using this switch There is no need to go into the Web Configurator Antenna The NBG4615 is equipped with two 2dBi 2 4GHz detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network USB Port The NBG4615 has two built in USB 2 0 type A for USB device connectivity and supports 3G USB dongle Operation Environment Temperature 09 C 409 C 329F 1049F Humidity 10 90 Storage Environment Temperature 309 C 709 C 229F 158 F Humidity 10 95 Table 92 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default LAN IP Address 192 168 1 1 router 192 168 1 2 AP Default LAN Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits NBG4615 User s Guide 237 Appendix A Product Specifications Table 92 Firmware Features
315. ot be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix F Common Services Table 108 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote hos
316. ot the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work base
317. ou change your NBG4615 s password If you forget your NBG4615 s password or IP address you will need to reset the device See Section 29 8 on page 221 for details Click Maintenance gt Password The screen appears as shown Figure 141 Maintenance gt Password Password Setup Password Setup Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm Apply Can cel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Maintenance Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Setup Change your NBG4615 s password recommended using the fields as shown Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh EJ NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance 29 5 Time Setting Screen Use this screen to configure the NBG4615 s time based on your local time zone To change your NBG4615 s time and date click Maintenance gt Time The screen appears as shown Figure 142 Maintenance gt Time Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 03 54 02 Current Date
318. plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License
319. quires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You may find the PIN number in the station s utility The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Use this button when you use the PBC Push Button Configuration method to configure wireless stations s wireless settings Click this to start WPS aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization Or input station s Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure PIN number wireless station s wireless settings Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station s utility Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN 15 9 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at certain times To open this screen click Network Wireless LAN Scheduling tab Figure 89 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling Security MAC Filter General Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS i Wireless LAN Scheduling T Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling Scheduling WLAN status Day For
320. r 172 server sets 177 NAT Traversal 207 Navigation Panel 72 80 86 94 103 navigation panel 72 80 86 94 103 Network Address Translation 171 174 O Operating Channel 70 79 85 102 operating mode 21 P P2P 204 Pairwise Master Key PMK 300 301 peer to peer 204 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 153 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 155 Pool Size 168 Port forwarding 174 177 default server 177 example 177 local server 174 port numbers services port speed 71 79 86 94 103 Power Specification 237 PPPoE 153 dial up connection PPTP 155 preamble mode 295 product registration 354 PSK 300 Q Quality of Service QoS 137 NBG4615 User s Guide Index R RADIUS 296 message types 297 messages 297 shared secret key 297 RADIUS server 127 registration product 354 related documentation 3 Remote management and NAT 205 limitations 205 system timeout 205 Reset button 47 Reset the device 47 Restore configuration 220 RF Radio Frequency 238 RIP 185 Roaming 136 Router Mode status screen 69 RTS Request To Send 294 threshold 293 294 RTS CTS Threshold 126 136 S safety warnings 6 Scheduling 140 Service and port numbers 191 203 Service Set 65 131 Service Set IDentification 65 131 Service Set IDentity See SSID Session Initiated Protocol 204 SIP 204 SSID 65 70 79 85 93 102 126 131 stateful inspection firewall 187 Static DHCP 169 Static Route 183 Status 69
321. r IP Addresses Example eum um um Um UM NND SSS UND S 192 168 1 1 WAN m um um um um um um 7 192 168 1 1 SS a am um um um eee eee m U QA ma NBG4615 User s Guide Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Note Your specific NBG4615 may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 264 e Windows Vista on page 267 e Windows 7 on page 271 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 275 e Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 on page 278 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 281 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 285 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT 1 Click Start Control Panel
322. r NBG4615 as an access point AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network In this mode your NBG4615 bridges a wired network LAN and wireless LAN WLAN in the same subnet See the figure below for an example Figure 46 Wireless Internet Access in Access Point Mode Many screens that are available in Router mode are not available in Access Point mode such as bandwidth management and firewall Note See Chapter 14 on page 105 for an example of setting up a wireless network in Access Point mode 10 2 What You Can Do e Use the Status screen to view read only information about your NBG4615 Section 10 4 on page 78 e Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG4615 acting as an access point Section 10 5 on page 80 10 3 What You Need to Know See Chapter 14 on page 105 for a tutorial on setting up a network with the NBG4615 as an access point NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 10 3 1 Setting your NBG4615 to AP Mode 1 Log into the Web Configurator if you haven t already See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this 2 To use your NBG4615 as an access point go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General and select Access Point mode Figure 47 Changing to Access Point mode Sys OP Mode Configuration Mode C Router Mode Access Point Mode c Universal Repeater Mode C wisP Mode C WISP UR Mode Note Router In this mode the device is supported
323. r can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 170 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example a IA 1 fi a lt a d 7 a 1 192 168 1 33 T iB B I Lg 192 168 1 33 hammmmmmm ee Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 171 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example as aes UN LAN WAN a 192 168 1 88 I L i I i L i i i 4 um um um ee eee NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 172 Conflicting Computer and Route
324. r names and passwords for your users Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication See page 127 for information about this Table 44 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 NBG4615 User s Guide 127 Chapter 15 Wireless LAN For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports For example suppose the AP does not have a local user database and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore
325. r of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 96 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation sumerwesk RUM T ner SED 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 96 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued sumwErwas ALTERNATIVE Laet OcTET LAST OCTET 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2
326. raries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software fu
327. reen to set the IPv6 settings for your NBG4615 WAN Internet This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters WAN IP Connection address assignment DNS servers and the WAN MAC address Advanced Use this screen to configure other advanced properties IGMP Use this screen to enable IGMP snooping if you have LAN users Snooping that subscribe to multicast services LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask IP Alias Use this screen to have the NBG4615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets DHCP Server General Use this screen to enable the NBG4615 s DHCP server Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT Application Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG4615 Advanced Use this screen to change your NBG4615 s port triggering settings DDNS General Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Static Route IP Static Use this screen to configure IP static routes Route RIP RIP Use this screen to enable RIPv1 or RIPv2 which are LAN broadcast protocols Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule Content Filter Content Filter Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keyw
328. reless LAN General Screen Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings of your NBG4615 Go to Configuration gt Wireless LAN General to open the following screen Figure 65 WISP Mode Wireless LAN gt General General Site Survey WISP Parameters SSID Channel Selection Security Mode Channel 01 2412MHz No Security v Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 WISP Mode Wireless LAN General LABEL DESCRIPTION WISP Parameters SSID Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless devices is called Selection a channel The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference Security Mode Select the security mode of the access point to which you want to connect Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 12 5 0 1 No Security Use this screen if the access point to which you want to connect does not use encryption Figure 66 No Security WISP WISP Parameters SSID Channel Selection Security Mode General Site Survey Channek 01 2412MHz 7 No Security Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 No Security WISP LABEL DESCRIPTION WISP P
329. ress Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP PPTP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given PPTP Gateway IP Type the gateway IP address of the PPTP server Address PPTP Server IP Type the server IP address of the PPTP server Address User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving Back Click this to return to the previous screen Next Click this to continue 4 3 5 Connection Type L2TP The Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP works at layer 2 the data link layer to tunnel network traffic between two peer devices over another network like the Internet Figure 13 Internet Connection Type L2TP 1 Internet Connection Type E2TP g Ple to the informat provided by your Internet Service Provide SiDynamic IP OStatic IP L2TP Address T12 1 171 L2TP Subnet Mask L2TP Gateway IP Address L2TP Server IP Address User Name Password The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Internet Connection Type L2TP LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Select L2TP from the drop down list box Connection Type Dynamic IP Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Table 10 Internet Conn
330. ress of the wireless device Signal This displays the strength of the wireless signal The signal strength mainly depends Strength on the antenna output power and the distance between your NBG4615 and this device Channel This displays the channel number used by this wireless device station encryp This displays the data encryption method used by this wireless device station auth This displays the authentication method used by this wireless device Network Type This displays the network type In Infrastructure or Ad Ad Hoc of this wireless device Rescan Click this button to search for available wireless devices within transmission range and update this table Setting Select a wireless device and click this button to add it to a profile NBG4615 User s Guide WISP UR Mode 13 1 Overview In WISP UR mode the NBG4615 has the same function as in WISP mode In addition it can provide WiFi function to the clients on the LAN side In the example below one NBG4615 A is configured as WISP UR mode and another is used as an access point B The NBG4615 A wirelessly connects to the available access point B and can provide WiFi wireless function to clients on its LAN side Figure 70 WISP UR Mode INTERNEJ Access Point built in firewall 13 2 What You Can Do Use the Status screen to view read only information about your NBG4615 Section 11 5 on page 84 e Us
331. rhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications
332. rioritize them Left click and I P2PIETP slide up or down priority 8 6 5 Firewall Enable this feature to protect the network from Denial of Service DoS attacks The NBG4615 blocks repetitive pings from the WAN that can otherwise cause systems to slow down or hang Figure 39 Firewall p Firewall X enu Firewall protects your computers against malicious attacks from the nternet Click OK to close this screen 8 6 6 Wireless Security Use this screen to configure security for your the Wireless LAN You can enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode in the following screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode Note You can enable the Wireless function of your NBG4615 by first turning on the switch in the back panel Figure 40 Wireless Security wireless Security Xx Data transmitted wirelessly without encryption is not safe Guard your wireless network with a security mode and the password you setup And then you can use WPS to connect your computers to your wireless network with just one single click Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL Security mode WPA2 PSK gt 5 Wireless password WPS Verify password The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 25 Wireless Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Name SSID Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with
333. rk status and task cose homegroup and sharing options jd t i Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Programs Uninstall a program View by Category Y User Accounts and Family Safety 9 Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution ay Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language MR Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Add a device 3 Click Change adapter settings Manage wireless networks a A Change adapter settings siete Change advanced sharing This computer settings View your active networks ZyXEL com Work network ET ET GO E gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v p Search Control Panel Home A 2 A View your basic network information and set up connections See full map ZyXEL com Internet Connect or disconnect Access type Internet Connections g Local Area Connection NBG4615 User s Guide 271 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties QU gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Renam
334. rmation The requirements for any country may evolve ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2 4 and 5 GHz wireless LANs The following countries have restrictions and or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Frequency Band MHz Max Power Level Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor EIRP 4 mW 2400 2483 5 100 V 5150 5350 200 V 5470 5725 1000 V Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications BIPT must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters Please check http www bipt be for more details Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie BIPT Zie http www bipt be voor meer gegevens Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en ext rieur d une distance sup rieure 300 m tres doivent tre notifi es l Institut Belge des services Postaux et des T l communications IBPT Visitez http www ibpt be pour de plus amples d tails Denmark In Denmark the band 5150 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage I Danmark m frekvensbandet 5150 5350 ogs anvendes udend rs France
335. rogram or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files
336. rrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones e Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles such as walls and ceilings between the AP and the wireless client Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously or add additional APs if necessary e Try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information it may have too many programs open that use the Internet e Position the antennas for best reception If the AP is placed on a table or floor point the antennas upwards If the AP is placed at a high position point the antennas downwards Try pointing the antennas in different directions and check which provides the strongest signal to the wireless clients 30 7 USB Device Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG4615 1 Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility for NetUSB functionality first from the included disc or download the latest version from the zyxel com website 2 Disconnect the problematic USB device then reconnect it to the NBG4615 3 Ensure that the USB device has power 4 Check your cable connections 5 Restart the NBG4615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it 6 If the USB device requires a special driver install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device After driver installation r
337. rsal Controls Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Location Automatic B e Internal Modem RS Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE e er NUNT Qu your computer does not have an IP address Ethernet E ely gree Configure Using DHCP FireWire e Not Connected AirPort e off DNS Server E o 1 Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 Catara 9 bom H8 id Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings NBG4615 User s Guide 279 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure list select Manually e In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask e In the Router field enter the IP address of your NBG4615 Location Automatic B e Internal Modem Q Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but e PPPoE Qe your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet AS comes ne Connes Y Subnet Mask CY om eS Router eT DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 AS Click the lock to prevent further changes 6 Click Apply and close the window NBG4615 User s Guide
338. rver needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTL
339. s Cancel Click Cancel to return your settings to the default Router Note If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you may not be able to connect to the Internet NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance NBG4615 User s Guide Troubleshooting 30 1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs NBG4615 Access and Login Internet Access Resetting the NBG4615 to Its Factory Defaults Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting USB Device Problems ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems 30 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The NBG4615 does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG4615 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG4615 and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4615 4 If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 5 on page 22 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables NBG4615 User s Guide 227 Chapter 30 Tro
340. s click Network Wireless LAN MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 84 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter QoS WPS WPS Station General Security i MAC Filter Advanced Scheduling WDS Access Policy SSID ZyXEL Policy Disable v Add a station Mac Address MAC Filter Summary Delete MAC Address Delete MAC Address W A4 88 CC 11 22 33 The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 49 Network Wireless LAN MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Policy SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filtering Policy Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Disable to deactivate the MAC filtering rule you configure below Select Allow to permit access to the NBG4615 MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG4615 Select Reject to block access to the NBG4615 MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG4615 Add a station Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to Mac Address the NBG4615 in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Click Add MAC Filter Summary Delete Click the delete icon to remove the MAC address from the list MAC Address This is the MAC address of the wireless station
341. s Ag n General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 157 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScript If pages of the web config
342. s Help Control Panel Home 7 p Aa Network and Sharing Center nnect to a network System and Maintenance View network computers and devices Add a device to the network Set up file sharing Security Network and Internet ER ARN NT 7M Internet Options Hardware and Sound Connecttothelnternet Changeyourhomepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies NBG4615 User s Guide 267 Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections CION Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center v gt File Edit View Tools Help Tasks 4 a Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network Set up a cannectinn or network A d 9t Manage network connections TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer aj Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties LAN or High Seesd Internet MI Loca Collapse group Left Arrow A Cotte Int Expand all groups nte Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then
343. s adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 179 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 180 Basic Service Set BSS ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 181 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet Channel A channel
344. scription Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Altemate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings Click Start gt All Programs gt Access
345. se User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG4615 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning address IP Address Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 4 2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG4615 supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE For the
346. security settings Release This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG4615 802 11 Mode This is the 802 11 mode used Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the NBG4615 SSID This is the name of the wireless network the NBG4615 s first SSID Security This is the type of wireless security employed by the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN 15 8 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station tab Note After you click Push Button on this screen you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes To add the second wireless station you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes Figure 88 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS General WPS Station Scheduling WDS Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations to wireless network Push Button Or input station s PIN number stari _ Note 1 The Push Button Configuration re
347. select Properties Networking Connect using Lu Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items o Client for Microsoft Networks dB Network Monitor3 Driver 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M Intemet Protocol Version ELICE Ey E 4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver amp Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder S Uninstall Properties J Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens 9 Pa Internet Protocol Version 4 ICP IPv4 Properties ele General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically i Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced L x j cae jJ Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default
348. select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer After the installation is complete select Start gt All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPv6 gt Client Install as service Select Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Services NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix G IPv6 4 Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Services ile by Services Local Action View Help SAB 9m Services Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As Provides la Started Automatic Local System Started Automatic ocal Start the service i 8 Automatic Local Systei Automatic Local System Sy Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Manual Network S Description SY DNS Client Resolves a Started Automatic Network S Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 Sy Error Reporting Service Allows erro Started Automatic Local System This is DHCPv6 ci Sy Event Log Enables ev Started Automatic Local System iig cient version Sy Extensible Authentication Protocol Provides wi Manual Local System 0 7 2 Sa Fast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Manual Local System Ss FLEXnet Licensing Service This servic Manual Local System sia i z x j a IN Extended 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DHCPv amp Client Display name Dibbler a DHCPv amp c
349. server or the last date configured manually yyyy mm dd When you select Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the NBG4615 get the time and date from the time server you specified below Auto Select Auto to have the NBG4615 automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply User Defined Time Server Address Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight
350. service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4615 rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG4615 does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation Figure 97 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation Internet Connection Advanced IGMP Snooping L ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation PPP over Ethernet User Name D Password Ci Retype to Confirm 1 Service Name Eee MTU Size a2 iv Nailed Up Connection kde Timeout sec Bo in seconds WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP C Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server From ISP 7 Second DNS Server From ISP
351. ses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen NBG4615 User s Guide 167 Chapter 19 DHCP Server 19 2 General Use this screen to enable the DHCP server Click Network DHCP Server The following screen displays Figure 106 Network gt DHCP Server gt General General Advanced LAN DHCP Setup v Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address i2 168 1 33 Pool Size 32 Apply cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Network DHCP Server General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Server Select the checkbox to enable DHCP for LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at startup from a server Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise Clear it to disable the NBG4615 acting as a DHCP server When configured as a server the NBG4615 provides TCP IP configuration for the clients If not DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computers must be manually configured When set as a server fill in the following four fields
352. shown Figure 101 Network WAN IGMP Snooping Internet Connection Advanced i IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Setup D LAN l LAN2 LAN3 F Lang The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Network gt WAN gt IGMP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable IGMP Snooping Select this option to have the NBG4615 use IGMP snooping Check the LAN port s to which IGMP snooping applies Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide EB Chapter 17 WAN NBG4615 User s Guide LAN 18 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server manage IP addresses and partition your physical network into logical networks Figure 102 LAN Example The LAN screens can help you manage IP addresses 18 2 What You Can Do e Use the IP screen to change the IP address for your Section 18 4 on page 165 Use the IP Alias screen to have the NBG4615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets Section 18 5 on page 165 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 18 LAN 18 3 What You Need To Know The actual p
353. signs you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the NBG4615 Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your NBG4615 that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4615 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved
354. similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in IPv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 110 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local node FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local node FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local connected link FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local connected link FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local site FF05 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 All DHCP severs on a local site The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 111 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS E F00 0 0
355. sion of such Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Linux Kernel Uboot Busybox bpalogin bridge utils dnsmasq hotplug2 igmpproxy iproute2 iptables linux igd mtd utils ntpclient ppp pppd plugins pptp rp I2pt quagga syslog ng updated wireless tools and gcc software under GPL 2 0 license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your
356. ss of your NBG4615 in dotted decimal notation NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 18 LAN Table 65 Network gt LAN gt IP Alias continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 166 NBG4615 User s Guide DHCP Server 19 1 Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG4615 s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the NBG4615 provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 19 1 1 What You Can Do e Use the General screen to enable the DHCP server Section 19 2 on page 168 e Use the Advanced screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Section 19 3 on page 169 19 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter MAC Addres
357. ss stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 Section 6 7 on page 54 6 3 The Log Screen The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG4615 s logs in one location NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 6 Monitor 6 3 1 View Log Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG4615 The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Select what logs you want to see from the Display drop list The log choices depend on your settings in the Log Settings screen Click Refresh to renew the log screen Click Clear to delete all the logs Figure 24 View Log Logs Display all log z Summary Message 1 13 lt WEB gt Jan 1 00 00 05 none root FS service boot OK 2 Jan 1 00 00 18 Find USB device DWC OTG Controller 3 Jan 100 00 18 Find USB device idVendor 1d6b idProduct 0002 4 13 WEB Jan 1 00 00 18 none root MODULE service boot OK 5 13 lt WEB gt Jan 1 00 00 18 none root HOTPLUG service boot OK 6 13 WEB Jan 1 00 00 18 none root USB service boot OK 7 Jan 1 00 00 19 Find USB device idVendor 05e3 idProduct 0608 8 Jan 00 00 19 Find USB device USB2 0 Hub 9 13 WEB Jan 1 00 00 30 none root lan17 up OK 192 168 1 1 37 lt 13 gt WEB Jan 1 00 00 47 none root IGMPProxy stop OK 38 13 WEB Jan 1 00 00 47 none root IGMPProxy stop OK 39 30 DHCPClient Jan 1 00 00 47 none dnsmasq 162g nameserver 208 67 222
358. subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 93 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST OCTET 20D EE 4TH OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal
359. supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network Universal Repeater Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client It can transmit wireless traffic between two wireless networks WISP Mode In this mode the device acts as a wireless client It can connect to an existing network via an access point Also router functions are added between the wireless WAN and the LAN WISP UR Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client and also maintains router function The wireless connection is treated as WAN while the LAN broadcast as Wi Fi signals for other wireless client devices to connect to Apply Cancel Note You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes As soon as you do your NBG4615 is already in Universal Repeater mode NBG4615 User s Guide EB Chapter 11 Universal Repeater Mode Note The Universal Repeater mode IP address is always the same as the Access Point mode IP address If you changed the IP address of your NBG4615 while in Access Point mode use this IP address in Universal Repeater mode 9 When you select Universal Repeater Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 54 Pop up for Universal
360. sure that your NBG4615 is turned on Make sure the WLAN switch at the back panel of the NBG4615 is set to ON and that the device is placed within range of your computer Make sure that you have installed the wireless client this example uses the NWD210N driver and utility in your notebook In the wireless client utility find the WPS settings Enable WPS and press the WPS button Start or NBG4615 User s Guide WPS button Chapter 14 Tutorials 4 Log into NBG4615 s Web Configurator and press the Push Button in the Configuration gt Network Wireless Client WPS Station screen Note Your NBG4615 has a WPS button located on its back panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility Both buttons have exactly the same function you can use one or the other Note It doesn t matter which button is pressed first You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one The NBG4615 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4615 securely The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG4615 and wireless client the NWD210N in this example Figure 75 Example WPS Process PBC Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 2 MINUTES D SECURITY INFO nunmmmmmmmmmmmmmu COMMUNICATI
361. t Or you can close the Utlity screen first then exit NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 1 Click the X on the upper right corner of the Utility FAz2yXEL NetUSB Share Center System Tools About d Configure uto Server Pr QR N0G4615 192 168 14 2 This will close the Utility screen to an icon at the system tray of your computer Right click on the Utility s icon and click Exit Open MetLISB Share Center 23 9 wvAe Qv NBG4615 User s Guide st Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 32 NBG4615 User s Guide Connection Wizard 4 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator The Web Configurator s wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet Refer to your ISP for your Internet account information Leave a field blank if you don t have that information 4 2 Accessing the Wizard Launch your web browser and type http 192 168 1 1 as the website address Type 1234 default as the password and click Login Note The Wizard appears when the NBG4615 is accessed for the first time or when you reset the NBG4615 to its default factory settings The Wizard screen opens Choose your Language and click Connect to I nternet Figure 6 Welcome 9E eazy 123 r router and connecting to the Internet Language NBG4615 User s Guide 3
362. t for example 15 00 is 3 00 PM 5 2 2 Password Screen You should see a screen asking you to change your password highly recommended as shown next Figure 20 Change Password Screen Use this screen to change the password The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your router or if you need to make basic configuration changes Use Advanced mode if you need access to more advanced features not included in Wizard mode New Password l Retype to Confirm lgnore NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Change Password Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION New Password Type a new password Retype to Confirm Retype the password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Ignore Click Ignore if you do not want to change the password this time Note The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator I nactivity Timer field expires default five minutes go to Chapter 29 on page 215 to change this Simply log back into the NBG4615 if this happens 5 2 3 Home Screen If you have previously logged into the Web Configurator but did not click Logout you may be redirected to the Home screen You can also open th
363. t automatically disconnect and reconnect the NBG4615 s power Then follow the directions above again 30 6 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting I cannot access the NBG4615 or ping any computer from the WLAN wireless AP or router 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG4615 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802 11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide 231 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 4 Make sure your computer with a wireless adapter installed is within the transmission range of the NBG4615 5 Check that both the NBG4615 and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG4615 7 Make sure you allow the NBG4615 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface Check your remote management settings e See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User s Guide for more information I set up URL keyword blocking but I can still access a website that should be blocked Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in
364. t includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA hash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed f this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the followi
365. t is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix F Common Services Table 108 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems in
366. t the L2TP Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol if you are connecting to another device over another network like the Internet or VPN Eg NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 3 1 Connection Type DHCP Choose DHCP as the Internet Connection Type when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet Click Next Figure9 Internet Connection Type DHCP 1 Internet Connection Type DHCP Generall Note If you get an error screen after clicking Next you might have selected the wrong Internet Connection type Click Back make sure your Internet connection is working and select the right Connection Type Contact your ISP if you are not sure of your Internet Connection type 4 3 2 Connection Type Static IP Choose Static IP as the I nternet Connection Type if your ISP assigned an IP address for your Internet connection Click Next Figure 10 Internet Connection Type Static IP 1 Internet Connection Type Static IP F 1 by your Internet Service Pre IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Internet Connection Type Static IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Connection Type Select the Static IP option IP Address Enter the IP address provided by your ISP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in this field NBG4615 User s Guide 35 Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
367. te UU 25 8 1 2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center LTD Lois ee dd eterne prt betta uer euis eda res aca 25 3 2 The ZyXEL MBILISB Share Center UU cse ur reap spec abest onse Dae usu Eee sa dodi qe RES ERN ar RUE MR Au 26 KA TNE GUS TTE 27 3 2 2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Configuration Window sse 29 3 2 3 The Auto Connect Printer List WiNdOW oae se tuii epp nana ne ne TadeaR n EXPE idana iaa 29 3 2 4 Exit the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility oai eerie tnt tne eere n pbte s secre 30 Chapter 4 Conmesctl n WEAF aiios itia ra a CL EE LEE ELDER OE ER ED IMMANE LIE 33 AEN MRNA 33 4 2 eric GENE M dd NBG4615 User s Guide 9 Table of Contents Z emer 2121 M18 21 12 TERT TT TOT R 34 wai sp APIS Tcp 35 2 2 2 Connection Topo AUP rera E etie es A rE 35 5 3 CONC On pe PPPBE 2 ore kN A ae 36 233 Conneccion Pe PPIP as o osetece a E i 37 2 2 9 Connection Tuer LETIS caiiad oaia pam U tases EEEE AEE EEE 38 a3 PROMI POSSI EAE EA A A ERG NODE E A d E E E E A E 40 da Nre a E eee c a a rer retry rer rerrrre ern ter ree 40 54 Wireless Saui No SBCOHBU asninn A ed eae es Pee E br ane 40 4 5 2 Wireless Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK oo eecccceecsceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeneeeeeaaeseeeaaeeenaaeeeeaaaeeeaas 41 Chapter 5 Introducing the Web Configurator eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee tenen nennen nnn nnn nna n snnm a nnne ns 43 ARE 5s o a enc 43 H 2 Accessing
368. that are allowed or denied access to the NBG4615 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN 15 5 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to allow wireless advanced features such as the output power RTS CTS Threshold and high throughput physical mode settings Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 85 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 Output Power 100 HT Physical Mode Operating Mode ia Mixed C Green Channel BandWidth C20 20 40 Guard Interval C long Auto Extension Channel AUTO Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS Request To Threshold Send CTS Clear To Send handshake Enter a value between 256 and 2432 Fragmentation The threshold number of bytes for the fragmentation boundary for directed Threshold messages It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter an even number between 256 and 2346 Output
369. that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words NBG4615 User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The NBG4615 icon is not an exact representation of your device NBG4615 Computer Notebook computer poe Server DSLAM Firewall Modem Switch Router t NBG4615 User s Guide 5 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device e Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device e Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on t
370. the NBG4615 checks the URL s domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking This means that the NBG4615 checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php content filtering only searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG4615 check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php full path URL checking searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw news Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s full path NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 25 Content Filtering File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG4615 check all of the characters in the URL For example filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s complete filename NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 25 Content Filtering NBG4615 User s Guide Bandwidth Management 26 1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify
371. the Web Cotto AOI s aeccuccsion riu Lene dUR oe mea Sa sah Lat a osi tiu o a us dd at 43 SRM eI c TRE 43 5 2 2 Passt SOE sano gia eadein ud vas ORCA b ape Oa ad a da 44 Boal FIOR ASTE E A NN EEEE roD M Dl CODO noe PEOD A EE CD Nd N E EINAT 45 99 Resting he NBEGAGI D em 47 Do Flow to Use ihe RESET BUUDIT auiem boe pne Das aa earn M d a 47 Chapter 6 DOIN 49 NES Jj 1 Ke 49 B2 Ni YOU CaN ED 22usoasvie ovde e a t e e Uu veru oa S REA E ane ane rU GA 49 MIS eger d NEU I UU T A T 49 Goi VOW LOQ 50 bd BN MONT MONG viii ERE daa c Ew pra aN D E a a 51 cbe pri ape mU 51 yea een ec 53 Ez LAN SERO OUS assises aer pd epidural UE redi RU Ru nt dra da Cd Ea ru E Rd 54 Chapter 7 ilte M 7 Y A E 55 pes ev E 55 Fobi ABD GODNQUESTDOF MOIES dus prid rod eb bp st gunn ED bet ERR Rebuild ub cx ER a EAEN ebbe RRS 55 FARBE S We qc T 55 Chapter 8 d 57 NEe CI m Mao MAR M 57 ES cH EE Ro TUM M M 58 3 What Vou Need to dii d 58 NBG4615 User s Guide Table of Contents A ICI RISD MT dogs 59 Bo PS e ists irae es maleate dau E orcs ok ead Sneed A tea das T dnd P Gnd ida ce E ance iadunineayy 59
372. the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neithe
373. the labels in this screen Table 46 Network Wireless LAN Security No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure the security Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 15 3 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Your NBG4615 allows you to configure up to four 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 15 Wireless LAN Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 82 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Static WEP General Security i MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS me Security SSID Zyxel v Security Mode Static wee v PassPhrase Generate WEP Encryption estis Authentication Method as v Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WE
374. the traffic to a server on the WAN Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 176 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 20 NAT 20 5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4615 features described in this chapter 20 5 1 NATPort Forwarding Services and Port Numbers A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A service request that do
375. tion 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT
376. tion and to adapt to dynamic protocols These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency however they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support Firewalls of one type or another have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises About the NBG4615 Firewall The NBG4615 s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks It is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box The NBG4615 s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The NBG4615 can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The NBG4615 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The NBG4615 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs securi
377. tions posted in Exhibit A collectively the GoAhead Marks in connection with the activities by You under this Agreement Additionally GoAhead grants You a license under the terms above to such GoAhead trademarks as shall be identified at a URL the URL provided by GoAhead The use by You of GoAhead Marks shall be in accordance with GoAhead trademark policies regarding trademark usage as established at the web site designated by the URL or as otherwise communicated to You by GoAhead at its sole discretion You understand and agree that any use of GoAhead Marks in connection with this Agreement shall not create any right title or interest in or to such GoAhead Marks and that all such use and goodwill associated with GoAhead Marks will inure to the benefit of GoAhead 4 2 Promotion by You of GoAhead WebServer Mark In consideration for the licenses granted by GoAhead to You herein You agree to notify GoAhead when You incorporate the GoAhead WebServer in Your product and to inform GoAhead when such product begins to ship You agree to promote the Original Code by prominently and visibly displaying a graphic of the GoAhead WebServer mark on the initial web page of Your product that is displayed each time a user connects to it You also agree that GoAhead may identify your company as a user of the GoAhead WebServer in conjunction with its own marketing efforts You may further promote the Original Code by displaying the GoAhead WebServer mark in mark
378. to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network Universal Repeater Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client It can transmit wireless traffic between two wireless networks WISP Mode In this mode the device acts as a wireless client It can connect to an existing network via an access point Also router functions are added between the wireless WAN and the LAN WISP UR Mode In this mode the device acts as both access point and wireless client and also maintains router function The wireless connection is treated as WAN while the LAN broadcast as Wi Fi signals for other wireless client devices to connect to Ae cance Note You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes As soon as you do your NBG4615 is already in Access Point mode 3 When you select Access Point Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 48 Pop up for Access Point mode Message from webpage x Ports are LAN 5 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN LAN DHCP server is disabled amp unconfigurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 2 WAN IP is unreachable pem Click OK The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to Access Point mode is successful 10 3 2 Accessing the Web
379. to the highest level and cannot be re arranged until the Game Engine is turned off Note When this is switched on the Game Console tab in the Bandwidth Mgmt screen is automatically positioned on top Turn this off if your network is not using gaming Click OK to close this screen 8 6 2 Power Saving Use this screen to set the day of the week and time of the day when your wireless LAN is turned on and off Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default NBG4615 User s Guide CE Chapter 8 Easy Mode Disabling the wireless capability lowers the energy consumption of the of the NBG4615 Figure 36 Power Saving A Power Saving si Please schedule the wireless service with the table below WLAN status Day For the following times 24 Hour Format Confor M Everyday 00 houn 00 min o0z chour 00 mim Conf of M Mon 00 houn 00 mim o0 noun 00 7 mim Conor Tl Tue 00 houn 00 min 00 hou 00 min ConC of wed 00 houn 00 7 mim 00 7 inoun 00 7 mim ConC of Thu 00 oun 00 min o0 inoun 00 min Con ot I fri 00 houn 00 min o0 inoun 00 7 min ConCor l sat 00 hour 00 imin 00 7 ihour 00 7 min ConCor Tsun 00 oup 00 min 00 7 houn 00 7 mir Cory Crese The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Power Saving LABEL DESCRIPTION WLAN Status Select On or Off to sp
380. ts contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes uClibc software under LGPL 2 1 license GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2
381. ty from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall Change the default password via Web Configurator Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way including attaching a modem to the port Limit who can access your router NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 24 Firewall 4 Don t enable any local service such as NTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network 5 For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces 6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active 7 Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 24 2 General Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG4615 s firewall and set up firewall logs Click Security gt Firewall to open the General screen Figure 120 Security gt Firewall gt General General j Services f L Firewall Setup v Enable Firewall Apply Cancel The f
382. u can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Check for Click this to check for the latest updated firmware Latest Firmware Now Note Do not turn off the NBG4615 while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the NBG4615 again The NBG4615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 144 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen NBG4615 User s Guide EJ Chapter 29 Maintenance If the upload was not successful an error message appears Click Return to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen 29 7 Configuration Backup Restore Screen Backup configuration allows you to back up save the NBG4615 s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your NBG4615 is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG4615
383. u to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 596 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points e Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees ver
384. u will have to log in again with the new IP address IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4615 Gateway IP Address Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP or network administrator gave you one in this field DNS Assignment First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4615 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the Second DNS Server read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide Universal Repeater Mode 11 1 Overv
385. ubleshooting 4 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the NBG4615 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor 30 3 NBG4615 Access and Login I don t know the IP address of my NBG4615 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the NBG4615 by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG4615 it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser Set your device to Router Mode login see the Quick Start Guide for instructions and go to the Device I nformation table in the Status screen Your NBG4615 s IP address is available in the Device I nformation table e If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None your device has a fixed IP address e If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network 3 If your NBG4615 is a DHCP client you can find your IP address from the DHCP server This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information 4 Reset your NBG4615 to change all settings back to their
386. ude Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail NBG4615 User s Guide 203 Chapter 26 Bandwidth Management Table 82 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION VoIP SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP BitTorrent BitTorrent is a free P2P peer to peer sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself It distributes files by corporation and trading that is the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file Gaming Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology As of this writing your NBG4615 supports Xbox Playstation Battlenet and MSN Game Zone NBG4615 User s Guide 27 Remote Ma
387. udgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor
388. ult selection Bigpond Select Enable if you subscribe to Internet service from BigPond in Australia Then configure the fields below with the information provided Server Type the IP address of the BigPond server User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP You can use alphanumeric and _ characters and it can be up to 31 characters long Password Type the password associated with the user name above Use up to 64 ASCII characters except and This field can be blank Retype to Type your password again for confirmation Confirm NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN Table 58 Network WAN Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed I P Address IP Subnet Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field Mask Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address WAN DNS Assignment First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4615 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only Second DNS DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you cho
389. ur wireless network Use one of the following approaches to get connected Click the Wi Fi Protected If your wireless client lt Setup button of your requires the Router s PIN Wireless wireless client and then Register number enter 31667609 Security click the button on the in it bottom WPS Register the PIN number of your wireless client Cem The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Wireless Security WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Security Click this to go back to the Wireless Security screen WPS Create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button The NBG4615 scans for a WPS enabled device within the range and performs wireless security information synchronization Note After you click the WPS button on this screen you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes To add the second wireless station you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes Register Create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client s PIN Personal Identification Number in the NBG4615 s interface and pushing this button Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station s utility Then click Register to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization Exit Click Exit to close this screen NBG4615 User s Guide
390. urator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScript are allowed NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 InInternet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Security tab Figure 158 Internet Options Security ic 2x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings j Aa o e Intemet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet Eo This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional F Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Figure 159 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting B Active scripting 8 Allow
391. urity MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling Universal Repeater Universal Repeater Parameters IV Enable SSID 1 MAC Address Optional 3 Security Mode WPA2 PSK v Encryption Type AES ae Pre Shared Key Eo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Universal Repeater Mode Wireless LAN gt Universal Repeater WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Universal Repeater Parameters Enable Select this option to have the NBG4615 connect to the specified access point SSID Enter the name of the access point to which you are connecting MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the access point to which you are connecting Optional Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK if the access point to which you want to connect uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Encryption Type Select the type of wireless encryption employed by the access point to which you want to connect Pre Shared Key WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password for authentication Type the password employed by the access point to which you want to connect Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4615 User s Guide WISP Mode 12 1 Overview Your NBG4615 can act as a wireless client In wireless client mode it can connect to an existing netw
392. used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes radvd software under below license The author s grant permission for redistribution and use in source and NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements binary forms with or without modification of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are met O If you receive a version of the software that is specifically labelled as not being for redistribution check the version message and or README you are not permitted to redistribute that version of the software in any way or form All terms of all other applicable c
393. ust cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the P
394. which a wireless station is associated Wireless stations associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Security mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Select No Security to allow any client to connect to this network without authentication Wireless This field appears when you choose wither WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK as the password security mode Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive keyboard characters Verify Type the password again to confirm password Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4615 Cancel Click Cancel to close this screen WPS Click this to configure the WPS screen You can transfer the wireless settings configured here Wireless Security screen to another wireless device that supports WPS NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 8 Easy Mode 8 6 7 WPS Use this screen to add a wireless station to the network using WPS Click WPS in the Wireless Security to open the following screen Figure 41 Wireless Security WPS wireless Security m WiFi Protected Setup WPS provides you a easier and faster way to connect your computers device to yo
395. works such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 94 LAN and WAN 17 2 What You Can Do e Use the Internet Connection screen to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP DNS and WAN MAC addresses Section 17 4 on page 151 e Use the Advanced screen to enable multicasting configure Windows networking and bridge Section 17 5 on page 159 e Use IGMP Snooping screen to enable IGMP snooping in the LAN ports Section 17 6 on page 160 17 3 What You Need To Know The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection as well as enable disable some advanced features of your NBG4615 NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN 17 3 1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG4615 which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by th
396. ws the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Server or Disable WLAN Information WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode Section 7 1 2 on page 55 to which the NBG4615 s wireless LAN is set MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN ON or OFF Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4615 in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG4615 is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG4615 is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard WPS This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up Click the status to display Network Wireless LAN WPS screen System Status Item This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording Data This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG4615 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4615 s processing ability is currently used
397. www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 92 Firmware Features continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION IP Multicast IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The NBG4615 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 Logging Use logs for troubleshooting You can view logs in the Web Configurator PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial up Internet access connection PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network VPN The NBG4615 supports one PPTP connection at a time Universal Plug and Play The NBG4615 can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a UPnP network Wall mounting Instructions Complete the following steps to hang your NBG4615 on a wall 1 Select a position free of obstructions on a sturdy wall 2 Drill two holes for the screws Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws 3 Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the NBG4615 w
398. x WAN MAC Address e Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address gy C Set WAN MAC Address j cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial up User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the user name above Retype to Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly Confirm MTU Size Enter the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU or the largest packet size per frame that your NBG4615 can receive and process Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out Connection Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router sec automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 17 WAN Table 59 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Assignment Get Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the automatically default selection from ISP Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP addr
399. x H Open Software Announcements endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl coreQ openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This produc
400. xample3 Channel 6 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey NBG4615 User s Guide 107 Chapter 14 Tutorials 5 Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG4615 The instructions require that your hardware is connected see the Quick Start Guide and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection see Section 5 2 on page 43 Make sure the WLAN switch at the back panel of the NBG4615 is set to ON Open the Configuration gt Wireless LAN gt General screen in the AP s Web Configurator Confirm that the status of wireless LAN is ON Enter SSID Example3 as the SSID and select Channel 06 as the channel Click Apply General Security MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Scheduling WDS Wireless Setup Hide Enable intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID1 Hide Enable Intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID2 F tide F Enable intra BSS Traffic Network Name SSID3 F tide F Enable intra BSS Traffic Channel Selection Channero6 2437MHz v Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 09 2452MHz Communication between wireless clients with different SSIDs Apply Cancel Go to the Configuration gt Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security screen Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply General Security MAC Filter Advanced
401. y Address Metric Assign a number to identify the route Interface Select the interface through which the traffic is routed Add Rule Click this to add the IP static route Application Rules Summary No This is the number of an individual static route Active The rules are always on and this is indicated by the icon Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Metric This is the number assigned to the route Delete Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the NBG4615 A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4615 User s Guide RIP 23 1 Overview Routing Information Protocol RIP is an interior or intra domain routing protocol that uses distance vector routing algorithms RIP is used on the Internet and is common in the NetWare environment as a method for exchanging routing information between routers 23 2 RIP Screen Use this screen to enable RIPv1 or RIPv2 which are LAN broadcast protocols Click Network RI P The screen
402. y ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Spanish Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Greek ME THN lIAPOYZA ZyXEL AHAQNEI OTI amp amp onAicu cG ZYMMOPOONETAI lIPOZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIX AOINES ZXETIKE2 AIATA EIZ TH OAHIIAZ 1999 5 EC French Par la pr sente ZyXEL d clare que l appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 EC Italian Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latvian Ar So ZyXEL deklar ka iekartas atbilst Direktivas 1999 5 EK b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem 354 NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix Legal Information Lithuanian iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Dutch Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EC Maltese Hawnhekk ZyXEL jiddikjara li dan tag mir jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
403. y Network Wireless LAN WPS screen System Status Item This column shows the type of data the NBG4615 is recording Data This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG4615 System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4615 has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG4615 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4615 s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the NBG4615 is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4615 is using System Setting Configuration Mode This shows the web configurator mode you are viewing Expert Summary Packet Statistics Click Details to go to the Monitor Packet Statistics screen Section 6 6 on page 53 Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Click Details to go to the Monitor WLAN Station Status screen Section 6 7 on page 54 Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4615 Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG4615 port types The port types are LAN and
404. y copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and per
405. y directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible NBG4615 User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area NBG4615 User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFI NED the Port s is the IP protocol number
406. your Maintenance settings NBG4615 User s Guide Chapter 10 Access Point Mode 10 4 AP Mode Status Screen Click to open the Status screen Figure 49 Status Screen Access Point Mode ZyXEL NBG4615 a Status CF Refresh Interval None z Device Information System Status Item Data Item Data Host Name NBG4615 Firmware Version V1 00 BWQ 0 B8 System Up Time 59 secs Current Date Time 1970 01 01 00 01 01 Sys OP Mode Access Point Mode System Resource LAN Information CPU Usage MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD AA 08 Memory Usage IP Address 192 168 1 2 System Setting IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP None WLAN Information Summary WLAN OP Mode Access Point Mode Packet Statistics Details MAC Address 00 E0 98 DD A amp 08 WLAN Station Status Details Status ON Name SSID ZyXEL Channel Auto Channel Channel 02 2417MHz Configuration Mode Operating Channel Security Mode No Security 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Unconfigured The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 31 Status Screen Access Point Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Logout Device Information Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created

ZyXEL NBG4615 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents